Hyundai ix20 2016 User Manual

OWNER'S

MANUAL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.

However, the right to amend specifications without notice or obligation to

incorporate such amendments into vehicles already produced is reserved.

This manual applies to all markets and includes descriptions and explana-

tions of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, some of the

equipment operating descriptions referred to may not apply to the particu-

lar vehicle with which this manual is supplied.

Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer for information

regarding current standard and optional equipment levels.

Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may

adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle.

Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification with-

out the express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not cov-

ered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

Particular attention is drawn to the fitment of replacement road wheels having a different specification

to those installed in production. The electric power assisted steering system is specifically pro-

grammed to operate only with the road wheels fitted during production. The installation of alternative

specification road wheels may result in the replacement road wheels fouling the vehicle body result-

ing in tyre damage and compromised safety. The installation of aftermarket wheels on vehicles

equipped with TPMS may result in wheel balancing difficulties or malfunction of the TPMS system.

Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer before non original specification road wheels

are installed.

This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro processor controlled

equipment.

It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile telephones to adverse-

ly affect these systems.

Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, please contact your Hyundai authorised repairer for

recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment concerned and the recom-

mended method of installation and equipment location. Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equipment

which gives rise to incorrect functioning of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not fall

within the scope of the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

✽

NOTICE

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other

persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the

caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

FOREWORD

Hyundai Motor Company wish to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing a Hyundai product and to welcome you to the

ever increasing number of discriminating motorists who drive Hyundai vehicles. The advanced engineering and construction meth-

ods employed during both design and production of the Hyundai marque are something of which we are proud, and this commit-

ment to providing a high quality product is supported by a comprehensive after sales and warranty service of which we are equal-

ly proud.

This owner's manual will introduce the operating and maintenance requirements for the vehicle and it is recommended that it is

carefully read to ensure that the maximum performance and durability along with safe and satisfactory operation are obtained. The

recommended routine maintenance servicing along with any running repairs that may be required should be entrusted to a

Hyundai authorised repairer to ensure that only the latest methods and genuine Hyundai replacement parts are used for the con-

tinued reliability, safety and performance of the vehicle.

Should any question or query exist regarding any aspect of your Hyundai please contact the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer

who will be only too pleased to assist wherever possible.

Note : This owners manual should be considered as part of the vehicle and should be kept in the vehicle at all times for ease of

reference.

In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of the new owner.

stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor

Manufacturing Czech s.r.o..

CAUTION

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai

specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-4 in the

Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts

1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are manufac-

tured to the same specification as

those used by Hyundai Motor

Manufacturing Czech s.r.o. to manu-

facture vehicles and are designed and

tested to guarantee optimum safety,

performance, and reliability.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-

neered and built to meet rigid manu-

facturing requirements. The use of imi-

tation, counterfeit or used salvage

parts is not covered under the Hyundai

New Vehicle Warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure of

Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the

installation or failure of an imitation,

counterfeit or used salvage part is not

covered by the Hyundai New Vehicle

Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchas-

ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts

Logo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to

are packaged with labels written only

in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold

through Hyundai authorised repairers.

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety system of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

table of contents

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle run-in process / 1-6

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-7

Introduction

This Owners Manual is designed to help

vehicle users derive the greatest possi-

ble amount of enjoyment and satisfaction

from driving the HYUNDAI vehicle. It is

strongly recommended that the entire

manual is read in order that all of the fea-

tures, safety systems and maintenance

requirements are understood.

To minimise the RISK of death or injury,

the "WARNING" and "CAUTION" state-

ments must be read and understood

before operating the vehicle.

Illustrations are used throughout the

manual to complement written descrip-

tions intended to best explain how to

enjoy using the vehicle.

Reading this manual will assist the vehi-

cle user to learn about and understand

the features, important safety informa-

tion, and driving recommendations.

The general layout of the manual is pro-

vided in the Table of Contents. The index

has an alphabetical listing of all the infor-

mation contained in the manual. The

manual has eight sections plus an index.

Each section begins with a brief list of

contents to easily identify at a glance if

that section contains the information

being sought.

"WARNING", "CAUTION", and "NOTICE"

information is provided to enhance the

personal safety of the vehicle user. This

information must be carefully read and

followed.

✽

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-

ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which harm, serious bodily injury or

death could result if the warning is

ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which damage to your vehicle could

result if the caution is ignored.

Introduction

Petrol engine

Unleaded

For Europe

For the optimal vehicle performance, we

recommend you to use unleaded petrol

with an octane rating of RON (Research

Octane Number) 95 /AKI (Anti Knock

Index) 91 or higher.

You may use unleaded petrol with an

octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI 87~90

but it may result in slight performance

reduction of the vehicle.

Except Europe

Your new vehicle is designed to use only

unleaded fuel having an Octane Rating

of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 /

AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain

maximum performance with UNLEADED

FUEL, as well as minimise exhaust emis-

sions and spark plug fouling.

Leaded (if equipped)

For some countries, your vehicle is

designed to use leaded petrol. When you

are going to use leaded petrol, ask a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer whether

leaded petrol in your vehicle is available

or not.

Octane Rating of leaded petrol is same

with unleaded one.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The

use of leaded fuel is detrimental to

the catalytic converter and will

damage the engine control sys-

tem’s oxygen sensor and affect

emission control.

Never add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified. (Consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer for

details.)

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refuelling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

Introduction

Petrol containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and ethanol

(also known as grain alcohol), and petrol

or gasohol containing methanol (also

known as wood alcohol) are being mar-

keted along with or instead of leaded or

unleaded petrol.

Do not use gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol, and do not use petrol or

gasohol containing any methanol. Either

of these fuels may cause drivability prob-

lems and damage to the fuel system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if

drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problems

may not be covered by the manufactur-

er’s warranty if they result from the use

of:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.

2. Petrol or gasohol containing methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

Use of MTBE

Fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary

Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen

Content 2.7% weight) should not be used

in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may

reduce vehicle performance and produce

vapour lock or hard starting.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-

hol) should not be used in your vehicle.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-

formance and damage components of

the fuel system.

Petrols for cleaner air

To help contribute to cleaner air, we rec-

ommend that you use petrols treated

with detergent additives, which help pre-

vent deposit formation in the engine.

These petrols will help the engine run

cleaner and enhance performance of the

Emission Control System.

Operation in foreign countries

Drivers of vehicles which are to be oper-

ated in foreign countries must satisfy

themselves that:

• The vehicle meets all local regulations

with respect to insurance, specifica-

tions etc..

• The correct types and grades of fuel

are available for satisfactory operation

of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty

may not cover damage to the fuel

system and any performance prob-

lems that are caused by the use of

fuels containing methanol or fuels

containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary

Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains

methanol. Discontinue use of any

gasohol product which impairs dri-

vability.

Introduction

Diesel engine

Diesel fuel

Diesel engine must be operated only on

commercially available diesel fuel that

complies with EN 590 or comparable

standard. (EN stands for "European

Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,

heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi-

tives, as this will increase wear and

cause damage to the engine and fuel

system. The use of non-approved fuels

and / or fuel additives will result in a limi-

tation of your warranty rights.

Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in

your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel

are available, use summer or winter fuel

properly according to the following tem-

perature conditions.

• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type

diesel fuel.

• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel

fuel.

Watch the fuel level in the tank very care-

fully : If the engine stops through fuel fail-

ure, the circuits must be completely

purged to permit restarting.

Biodiesel

Commercially supplied Diesel blends of

no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly

known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in

your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214

or equivalent specifications. (EN stands

for "European Norm"). The use of biofu-

els exceeding 7% made from rapeseed

methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl

ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester

(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding

7% with biodiesel will cause increased

wear or damage to the engine and fuel

system. Repair or replacement of worn or

damaged components due to the use of

non approved fuels will not be covered by

the manufactures warranty.

CAUTION - Diesel Fuel

(if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regu-

lated automotive diesel fuel for

diesel vehicle equipped with the

DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high

sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)

and unspecified additives, it can

cause the DPF system to be dam-

aged and white smoke can be emit-

ted.

CAUTION

Do not let any petrol or water enter

the tank. This would make it neces-

sary to drain it out and to bleed the

lines to avoid jamming the injection

pump and damaging the engine.

CAUTION

• Never use any fuel, whether

diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,

that fails to meet the latest petro-

leum industry specification.

• Never use any fuel additives or

treatments that are not recom-

mended or approved by the vehi-

cle manufacturer.

Introduction

VEHICLE RUN-IN PROCESS

No special run-in period is needed. By

following a few simple precautions for the

first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to

the performance, economy and life of

your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• Whilst driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute)

between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long

periods of time, either fast or slow.

Varying engine speed is needed to

properly run-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-

cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-

erly.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3

minutes at one time.

• Don't tow a trailer/caravan during the

first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of opera-

tion.

Introduction

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Engine coolant temperature

warning light

Seat belt warning light

High beam indicator

Turn signal indicator

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

warning light*

Parking brake & Brake fluid

warning light

Malfunction indicator

Immobiliser indicator Glow indicator (Diesel only)

Fuel filter warning light

(Diesel only)

Tailgate open warning light*

Charging system warning light

Door ajar warning light*

Electric stability program (ESP)

indicator*

ESP OFF indicator*

Front fog light indicator*

Engine oil pressure warning

light

Electric power steering (EPS)

system warning light

Air bag warning light

Low tyre pressure telltale* /

TPMS malfunction indicator*

Rear fog light indicator

Cruise SET indicator*

AUTO STOP for ISG system

indicator*

Cruise indicator*

Light on indicator

Automatic transaxle shift posi-

tion indicator (Automatic

transaxle only)

Manual transaxle shift indicator

(Manual transaxle only)

* if equipped

Low fuel level warning light

Engine oil level warning light

Low beam indicator

Door and tailgate ajar warning

light*

❈ For more detailed explanations, refer

to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Inside door handle ............................4-14

2. Outside rearview mirror folding

button*...............................................4-39

3. Outside rearview mirror control

switch*...............................................4-38

4. Power window lock switch* ...............4-22

5. Power window switches*...................4-19

6. Bonnet release lever.........................4-24

7. Fuse box ............................................7-39

8. Parking assist OFF button*...............4-63

9. Instrument panel illumination* ..........4-41

10. ISG OFF button* .............................5-16

11. ESP OFF button* ............................5-31

12. Head light levelling device ..............4-74

13. Steering wheel ................................4-33

14. Steering wheel tilt lever...................4-34

15. Seat...................................................3-2

16. Fuel filler lid release lever...............4-26

* if equipped

OJC020001R

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-44

2. Light control/Turn signals .................4-69

3. Instrument cluster.............................4-40

4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-75

5. Steering wheel audio controls* ......4-112

6. Auto cruise controls*/Speed limit

controls* ...................................5-36/5-41

7. Audio controls* ...............................4-116

8. Digital clock ....................................4-103

9. Hazard warning flasher switch .........4-68

10. Central door lock/unlock switch......4-14

11. Seat warmer* ...................................3-8

12. Climate control system...................4-81

13. Passenger’s front air bag ...............3-44

14. Glove box .....................................4-100

15. Power outlet*/Cigarette lighter*

...........................................4-106/4-104

16. Shift lever .......................................5-18

17. Parking brake .................................5-27

* if equipped

OJC020002R

* The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-14

2. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-12

3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir...............7-16

4. Positive battery terminal ......................6-5

5. Negative battery terminal ....................6-5

6. Fuse box............................................7-40

7. Air cleaner .........................................7-21

8. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick*.....7-17

9. Radiator cap ......................................7-15

10. Engine oil dipstick............................7-12

11. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir ..7-19

* : if equipped

* The actual engine room including engine cover in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OYN029003R

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-14

Child restraint system / 3-27

Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-37

Safety features of your vehicle

Driver’s seat

(1) Seat adjustment, forward/backward

(2) Seatback recliner

(3) Seat adjustment, height

(4) Seat warmer*

(5) Armrest*

(6) Head restraint adjustment

Front passenger seat

(7) Seat adjustment, forward/backward

(8) Seatback recliner

(9) Seat warmer*

(10) Head restraint adjustment

Rear seat

(11) Seat adjustment, forward/backward

(12) Armrest

(13) Head restraint adjustment

(14) Split folding rear seat

* if equipped

SEATS

OJC030001R

* The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust seat

whilst the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control,

and an accident causing death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• Do not allow anything to interfere

with the normal position of the

seatback. Storing items against a

seatback or in any other way

interfering with proper locking of

a seatback could result in serious

or fatal injury in a sudden stop or

collision.

• Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap por-

tion of the seat belt snug and low

across the hips. This is the best

position to protect you in case of

an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessary

and perhaps severe air bag

injuries, always sit as far back as

possible from the steering wheel

whilst maintaining comfortable

control of the vehicle. We recom-

mend that your chest be at least

250 mm (10 inches) away from

the steering wheel.

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly and be sure

there are no other occupants

around the seat. If the seatback is

returned without being held and

controlled, the back of the seat

could move forward or backward

resulting in accidental injury to a

person struck by the seatback.

WARNING - Driver respon-

sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with seatback

reclined could lead to serious or

fatal injury in an accident. If a seat

is reclined during an accident, the

occupant’s hips may slide under

the lap portion of the seat belt

applying great force to the unpro-

tected abdomen. The protection of

your retraint system (seat belt and

air bags) is greatly reduced by

reclining your seat. Serious or fatal

internal injuries could result. The

driver must advise the passenger

to keep the seatback in an upright

position whenever the vehicle is in

motion.

WARNING - Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver’s foot

area could interfere with the opera-

tion of the foot pedals, possibly

causing an accident. Do not place

anything under the front seats.

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up

and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and backward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

OJC030002/H

(Continued)

• When resetting the seatback to

the upright position, make sure it

is securely latched by pushing it

forward and backwards.

• To avoid the possibility of burns,

do not remove the carpet in the

cargo area. Emission control

devices beneath this floor gener-

ate high temperatures.

WARNING - Rear seatbacks

• The rear seatback must be

securely latched. If not, passen-

gers and objects could be thrown

forward resulting in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo should

be laid flat in the cargo area. If

objects are large, heavy, or must

be piled, they must be secured.

Under no circumstances should

cargo be piled higher than the

seatbacks. Failure to follow these

warnings could result in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop, collision or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in the

cargo area or sit or lie on folded

seatbacks whilst the vehicle is

moving. All passengers must be

properly seated in seats and

restrained properly whilst riding.

(Continued)

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always

check that it is securely locked into

place by attempting to move the

seat forward or backward without

using the lock release lever.

Sudden or unexpected movement

of the driver's seat could cause you

to lose control of the vehicle result-

ing in an accident.

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the seatback recliner

To recline the seatback, rotate the knob

forward or rearward to the desired angle.

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat cushion,

move the lever upwards or downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever

up several times.

Armrest (for driver’s seat, if equipped)

To use the armrest, swing down the arm-

rest to the lowest position.

OJC030004/H

OJC030003/H

OSA038123/H

Safety features of your vehicle

Head restraint

The driver's and front passenger's seats

are equipped with a head restraint for the

occupant's safety and comfort.

The head restraint not only provides

comfort for the driver and front passen-

ger, but also helps to protect the head

and neck in the event of a collision.

Forward and backward (if equipped)

The head restraint will be adjusted for-

ward to 3 positions by pulling it forward.

To adjust the head restraint backward,

pull it fully forward to the foremost posi-

tion and release it. Adjust the head

restraint so that it properly supports the

head and neck.

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the head

restraint should be adjusted so

the middle of the head restraint is

at the same height of the centre

of gravity of an occupant's head.

Generally, the centre of gravity of

most people's head is similar

with the height of the top of their

eyes. Also, adjust the head

restraint as close to your head as

possible. For this reason, the use

of a cushion that holds the body

away from the seatback is not

recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the head restraints removed as

severe injury to the occupants

may occur in the event of an acci-

dent. Head restraints may provide

protection against neck injuries

when properly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the head restraint

position of the driver’s seat

whilst the vehicle is in motion.

OPA039052

OYN039039

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint, pull it up to

the desired position (1). To lower the

head restraint, push and hold the release

button (2) on the head restraint support

and lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the head restraint, raise it as

far as it can go then press the release

button (1) whilst pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the head restraint, put the

head restraint poles (3) into the holes

whilst pressing the release button (1).

Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

Active head restraint (if equipped)

The active head restraint is designed to

move forward and upward during a rear

impact. This helps to prevent the driver's

and front passenger’s heads from mov-

ing backward and thus helps prevent

neck injuries.

HNF2041-1/H

WARNING

Make sure the head restraint locks

in position after adjusting it for

proper protection of the occupants.

WARNING

A gap between the seat and the

head restraint release button may

appear when seating on the seat or

when you push or pull the seat. Be

careful not to get your finger, etc.

caught in the gap.

OJC030007 OJC030008

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the

front seats during cold weather. With the

ignition switch in the ON position, push

either of the switches to warm the driver's

seat or the front passenger's seat.

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF

position whenever the ignition switch is

turned on.

During mild weather or under conditions

where the operation of the seat warmer

is not needed, keep the switches in the

"OFF" position.

✽

NOTICE

• With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the

seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

• If the seat warmer doesn't work when

the ambient temperature is below 21

°C (70 °F), have the system checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such as

thinner, benzene, alcohol and

petrol. Doing so may damage the

surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat

warmer, do not place blankets,

cushions or seat covers on the

seats whilst the seat warmer is in

operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped with

seat warmers. Damage to the seat

warming components could occur.

OJC030009

OJC030010

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

Rear seat adjustment

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up

and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Make sure the seat is locked securely by

trying to move forward and backward

without using the lever. If the seat moves,

it is not locked properly.

WARNING - Seat warmer

burns

Passengers should use extreme

caution when using seat warmers

due to the possibility of excess

heating or burns. In particular, the

driver must exercise extreme care

for the following types of passen-

gers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-

abled persons, or hospital outpa-

tients

2. Persons with sensitive skin or

those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold

tablets, etc.)

WARNING - Seatback

pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects

in the seatback pockets. In an acci-

dent they could come loose from

the pocket and injure vehicle occu-

pants.

OYN039010

OJC030014

Safety features of your vehicle

103

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.

2. Hold the lever and adjust the seatback

of the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks may be folded to

facilitate carrying long items or to

increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

To fold the rear seat

1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the

pocket between the rear seatback and

cushion, and insert the rear seat belt in

the guide to prevent the seat belt from

being damaged.

2. Set the front seatback to the upright

position and if necessary, slide the

front seat forward and the rear seat

rearward.

3. Lower the rear head restraints to low-

est position.

WARNING

The purpose of the fold-down rear

seatbacks is to allow you to carry

longer objects than could not oth-

erwise be accommodated.

Never allow passengers to sit on

top of the folded down seatback

whilst the car is moving as this is

not a proper seating position and

no seat belts are available for use.

This could result in serious injury

or death in case of an accident or

sudden stop. Objects carried on the

folded down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of the

front seats. This could allow cargo

to slide forward and cause injury or

damage during sudden stops.

OJC030035

OJC030013

311

Safety features of your vehicle

4. Pull the lock release lever and fold the

rear seatback forward and down firmly.

5. To use the rear seat, lift the seatback

by pulling the lock release lever and

push the seatback backward firmly

until it clicks into place. Make sure the

seatback is locked in place.

6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper

position.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback

to its upright position after being

folded down:

Be careful not to damage the seat

belt webbing or buckle. Do not

allow the seat belt webbing or

buckle to get caught or pinched in

the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-

back is completely locked into its

upright position by pushing on the

top of the seatback. Otherwise, in

an accident or sudden stop, the

seat could fold down and allow

cargo to enter the passenger com-

partment, which could result in

serious injury or death.

CAUTION - Damaging rear

seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear seatback or

put luggage on the rear seat cush-

ion, insert the buckle in the pocket

between the rear seatback and

cushion. Doing so can prevent the

buckle from being damaged by the

rear seatback or luggage.

OJC030013

CAUTION - Rear seat belts

When returning the rear seatbacks

to the upright position, remember

to return the rear shoulder belts to

their proper position.

Safety features of your vehicle

123

Head restraint

The rear seat(s) is equipped with head

restraints in all the seating positions for

the occupant's safety and comfort.

The head restraint not only provides

comfort for passengers, but also helps to

protect the head and neck in the event of

a collision.

OPA039053

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the head

restraint should be adjusted so

the middle of the head restraint is

at the same height of the centre

of gravity of an occupant's head.

Generally, the centre of gravity of

most people's head is similar

with the height of the top of their

eyes. Also adjust the head

restraint as close to your head as

possible. The use of a cushion

that holds the body away from

the seatback is not recommend-

ed.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the head restraints removed as

severe injury to an occupant may

occur in the event of an accident.

Head restraints may provide pro-

tection against severe neck

injuries when properly adjusted.

WARNING - Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the

automatic transaxle is in P (Park)

and the parking brake is applied

whenever loading or unloading

cargo. Failure to take these steps

may allow the vehicle to move if

shift lever is inadvertently moved to

another position.

WARNING - Cargo

Cargo should always be secured to

prevent it from being thrown about

the vehicle in a collision and caus-

ing injury to the vehicle occupants.

Special care of objects should be

taken when placing them in the rear

seats, since those may hit the front

seat occupants in a frontal colli-

sion.

313

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint, pull it up to

the highest position (1). To lower the

head restraint, push and hold the release

button (2) on the head restraint support

and lower the head restraint to the lowest

position (3).

Removal

To remove the head restraint, raise it as

far as it can go then press the release

button (1) whilst pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the head restraint, put the

head restraint poles (3) into the holes

whilst pressing the release button (1).

Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

Armrest (if equipped)

The armrest is located in the centre of

the rear seat. Pull the armrest down from

the seatback.

OYN039012

WARNING

Make sure the head restraint locks

in position after adjusting it for

proper protection of the occupants.

OJC030015

OYN039011

Safety features of your vehicle

143

Seat belt restraint system

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must

always be used whenever the car

is moving.

• Seat belts are most effective

when seatbacks are in the

upright position.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he/she

must be properly belted and the

seat should be moved as far back

as possible.

• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back. An improperly positioned

shoulder belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash. The shoulder

belt should be positioned midway

over your shoulder across your

collarbone.

(Continued)

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear

upon the bony structure of the

body, and should be worn low

across the front of the pelvis or the

pelvis, chest and shoulders, as

applicable; wearing the lap section

of the belt across the abdominal

area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection

for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the

protection afforded to the wearer.

(Continued)

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.

A twisted belt can't do its job as

well. In a collision, it could even

cut into you. Be sure the belt

webbing is straight and not twist-

ed.

• Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. If the belt

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged, replace it.

WARNING

No modifications or additions

should be made by the user which

will either prevent the seat belt

adjusting devices from operating to

remove slack, or prevent the seat

belt assembly from being adjusted

to remove slack.

(Continued)

Care should be taken to avoid con-

tamination of the webbing with pol-

ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-

ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may

safely be carried out using mild

soap and water. The belt should be

replaced if webbing becomes

frayed, contaminated or damaged.

It is essential to replace the entire

assembly after it has been worn in

a severe impact even if damage to

the assembly is not obvious. Belts

should not be worn with straps

twisted. Each belt assembly must

only be used by one occupant; it is

dangerous to put a belt around a

child being carried on the occu-

pant's lap.

315

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt warning

Front seat

(1) Driver’s seat belt warning light

(2) Front passenger’s seat belt warning

light

As a reminder to the driver and front pas-

senger, the driver’s and front passenger’s

seat belt warning lights will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the ignition switch ON regardless of

belt fastening.

If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat

belt is not fastened when the ignition

switch is turned ON or if it is disconnect-

ed after the ignition switch is turned ON,

the corresponding seat belt warning light

will illuminate until the belt is fastened.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt

and you drive over 5 mph (9 km/h), the

illuminated warning light will start to blink

or illuminate until you drive under 3 mph

(6 km/h).

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt

and you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h) the

seat belt warning chime will sound for

approximately 100 seconds and the cor-

responding warning light will blink.

✽

NOTICE

• You can find the front passenger’s

seat belt warning light on the centre

fascia panel.

• Although the front passenger seat is

not occupied, the seat belt warning

light will illuminate for 6 seconds.

• The front passenger's seat belt warn-

ing may operate when luggage is

placed on the front passenger seat.

OJC030016R

Safety features of your vehicle

163

Rear seat

If the ignition switch is turned ON (engine

is not running) when the rear passen-

ger's seat belt is not fastened, the corre-

sponding seat belt warning light will illu-

minate until the belt is fastened.

And then, the rear corresponding seat

belt warning light will illuminate for

approximately 35 seconds, if any of the

following occurs:

- You start the engine when the rear belt

is not fastened.

- You drive over 5 mph (9 km/h) when the

rear belt is not fastened.

- The rear belt is disconnected when you

driver under 12 mph (20 km/h).

If the rear seat belt is fastened, the warn-

ing light will turn off immediately.

If the rear seat belt is disconnected when

you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h), the cor-

responding seat belt warning light will

blink and warning chime will sound for 35

seconds.

But, if the rear passenger's seat belt

is/are connected and disconnected twice

within 9 seconds after the belt is fas-

tened, the corresponding seat belt warn-

ing light will not operate.

Lap/shoulder belt

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the

retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into

the buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the

proper length only after the lap belt por-

tion is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips. If you lean for-

ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will

extend and let you move around. If there

is a sudden stop or impact, however, the

belt will lock into position. It will also lock

if you try to lean forward too quickly.

OJC030017

B180A01NF/H

317

Safety features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

If you are not able to pull out the safety

belt from the retractor, firmly pull the

belt out and release it. After release, you

will be able to pull the belt out smooth-

ly.

Height adjustment (Front seat)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder

belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-

imum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt

should not be too close to your neck. You

will not be getting the most effective pro-

tection. The shoulder portion should be

adjusted so that it lies across your chest

and midway over your shoulder near the

door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster

into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).

To lower it, push it down (3) whilst press-

ing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has locked

into position.

OUN026100

WARNING

• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-

priate height. Never position the

shoulder belt across your neck or

face. Improperly positioned seat

belts can cause serious injuries

in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts after

an accident could leave you with

damaged seat belts that will not

provide protection in the event of

another collision leading to per-

sonal injury or death. Replace

your seat belts after being in an

accident as soon as possible.

Safety features of your vehicle

183

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the

release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should auto-

matically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to

be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Stowing the rear seat belt

The rear seat belt buckles should be

stowed in the pocket between the rear

seatback and cushion when not in use.

WARNING

You should place the lap belt por-

tion as low as possible and snugly

across your hips, not on your waist.

If the lap belt is located too high on

your waist, it may increase the

chance of injury in the event of a

collision. Both arms should not be

under or over the belt. Rather, one

should be over and the other under,

as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the

arm nearest the door.

OJC030047B210A01NF/H

B200A01NF/H

319

Safety features of your vehicle

3 Point rear centre belt

(if equipped)

To fasten the rear centre belt

1. Extract the tongue plates from the

holes on the belt assembly cover and

slowly pull the tongue plates out from

the retractor.

2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the

open end of the anchor connector (C)

until an audible “click" is heard, indi-

cating the latch is locked. Make sure

the belt is not twisted.

3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the

tongue plate (B) into the open end of

the buckle (D) until an audible “click” is

heard, indicating the latch is locked.

Make sure the belt is not twisted.

OYN039018

1LDN3208A/H

CAUTION - Cargo

Be sure that the cargo is securely

loaded in the rear cargo area. Not

doing so may damage the rear cen-

tre safety belt in sudden stop or

certain collisions.

1LDN3209/H

Safety features of your vehicle

203

There will be an audible “click” when the

tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt

automatically adjusts to the proper length

only after the lap belt is adjusted manu-

ally so that it fits snugly around your hips,

if you lean forward in a slow, easy

motion, the belt will extend and let you

move around. If there is a sudden stop or

impact, the belt will lock into position. It

will also lock if you try to lean forward too

quickly.

To unfasten the rear centre belt

1. Press the release button on the buckle

(D) and remove the tongue plate (B)

from the buckle (D).

2. To retract the rear centre seatbelt,

insert the key or similar small rigid

device into the web release button (C)

on the anchor connector. Pull up the

seat belt web (A) and allow the web-

bing to retract automatically.

3. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the

tongue plate pocket (B) and hang the

tongue plate to the hook.

WARNING

When using the rear seat centre

belt, you must lock all tongue

plates and buckles. If any tongue

plate or buckle is not locked, it will

increase the risk of injury in the

event of collision.

1LDN3210/H

1LDN3211A

OYN039044

321

Safety features of your vehicle

When using the rear centre seat belt, the

buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be

used.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and

front passenger's pre-tensioner seat

belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is

to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly

against the occupant's body in certain

frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat

belts may be activated in crashes where

the frontal collision is severe enough.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if

the occupant tries to lean forward too

quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock

into position. In certain frontal collisions,

the pre-tensioner will activate and pull

the seat belt into tighter contact against

the occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive seat belt

tension on the driver or passenger's seat

belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the

load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will

release some of the pressure on the

affected seat belt. (if equipped)

OJC030019

OED030300/H

Safety features of your vehicle

223

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

✽

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts will be

activated in certain frontal collisions.

The pre-tensioner seat belts can be

activated, where the frontal collision

is severe enough, together with the air

bags.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are

activated, a loud noise may be heard

and fine dust, which may appear to be

smoke, may be visible in the passenger

compartment. These are normal oper-

ating conditions and are not haz-

ardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dust

may cause skin irritation and should

not be breathed for prolonged peri-

ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-

oughly after an accident in which the

pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-

ed.

WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a

pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the proper

position. Please read and follow

all of the important information

and precautions about your vehi-

cle’s occupant safety features –

including seat belts and air bags

– that are provided in this manu-

al.

2. Be sure you and your passen-

gers always wear seat belts prop-

erly.

8KMB3311/H

323

Safety features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS air

bag is connected with the pre-tensioner

seat belt and the SRS air bag warning

light ( ) on the instrument panel will

illuminate for approximately 6 seconds

after the ignition switch has been turned

to the ON position, and then it should

turn off.

WARNING

• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-

vation, pre-tensioner seat belts

must be replaced. All seat belts,

of any type, should always be

replaced after they have been

worn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat belt

assembly mechanisms become

hot during activation. Do not

touch the pre-tensioner seat belt

assemblies for several minutes

after they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect or

replace the pre-tensioner seat

belts yourself. This must be done

by a HYUNDAI authorised repair-

er.

• Do not strike the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies.

• Improper handling of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt assemblies, and

failure to heed the warnings not

to strike, modify, inspect, replace,

service or repair the pre-tension-

er seat belt assemblies may lead

to improper operation or inadver-

tent activation and serious injury.

(Continued)

CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not

working properly, this warning light

will illuminate even if there is no

malfunction of the SRS air bag. If

the SRS air bag warning light does

not illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to ON, or if it

remains illuminated after illuminat-

ing for approximately 6 seconds, or

if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is

being driven, please have a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt

or SRS air bag system as soon as

possible.

(Continued)

• Always wear the seat belts when

driving or riding in a motor vehi-

cle.

• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner

seat belt must be discarded, con-

tact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Safety features of your vehicle

243

Seat belt precautions

Infant or small child

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child

and/or infant seats must be properly

placed and installed in the rear seat. For

more information about the use of these

restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tem” in this section.

✽

NOTICE

Small children are best protected from

injury in an accident when properly

restrained in the rear seat by a child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Safety Standards of your

country. Before buying any child

restraint system, make sure that it has a

label certifying that it meets Safety

Standards of your country. The restraint

must be appropriate for your child's

height and weight. Check the label on

the child restraint for this information.

Refer to “Child restraint system” in this

section.

WARNING

All occupants of the vehicle must

wear their seat belts at all times.

Seat belts and child restraints

reduce the risk of serious or fatal

injuries for all occupants in the

event of a collision or sudden stop.

Without a seat belt, occupants

could be shifted too close to a

deploying air bag, strike the interior

structure or be thrown from the

vehicle. Properly worn seat belts

greatly reduce these hazards.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant seating contained in this man-

ual.

WARNING

Every person in your vehicle needs

to be properly restrained at all

times, including infants and chil-

dren. Never hold a child in your

arms or lap when riding in a vehi-

cle. The violent forces created dur-

ing a crash will tear the child from

your arms and throw the child

against the interior. Always use a

child restraint appropriate for your

child's height and weight.

325

Safety features of your vehicle

Larger children

Children who are too large for child

restraint systems should always occupy

the rear seat and use the available

lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should

be fastened and snugged on the hips

and as low as possible. Check if the belt

fits periodically. A child's squirming could

put the belt out of position. Children are

given the most safety in the event of an

accident when they are restrained by a

proper restraint system in the rear seat. If

a larger child (over age 12) must be seat-

ed in the front seat, the child should be

securely restrained by the available

lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be

placed in the rearmost position. Children

age 12 and under should be restrained

securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a

child age 12 and under in the front seat.

NEVER place a rear facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-

es the child’s neck or face, try placing the

child closer to the centre of the vehicle. If

the shoulder belt still touches their face

or neck they need to be returned to a

child restraint system.

Pregnant women

The use of a seat belt is recommended

for pregnant women to lessen the chance

of injury in an accident. When a seat belt

is used, the lap belt portion should be

placed as low and snugly as possible on

the hips, not across the abdomen. For

specific recommendations, consult a

physician.

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should con-

sult a physician for recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

WARNING - Shoulder belts

on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to be

in contact with a child’s neck or

face whilst the vehicle is in

motion.

• If seat belts are not properly worn

and adjusted on children, there is

a risk of death or serious injury.

WARNING - Pregnant

women

Pregnant women must never place

the lap portion of the safety belt

over the area of the abdomen

where the fetus is located or above

the abdomen where the belt could

crush the fetus during an impact.

Safety features of your vehicle

263

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the

event of an accident and to achieve max-

imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-

tem, all passengers should be sitting up

and the front and rear seats should be in

an upright position when the car is mov-

ing. A seat belt cannot provide proper

protection if the person is lying down in

the rear seat or if the front and rear seats

are in a reclined position.

Care of seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be disas-

sembled or modified. In addition, care

should be taken to assure that seat belts

and belt hardware are not damaged by

seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected peri-

odically for wear or damage of any kind.

Any damaged parts should be replaced

as soon as possible.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.

If belts become dirty, they should be

cleaned by using a mild soap solution

and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong

detergents or abrasives should not be

used because they may damage and

weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire in-use seat belt assembly or

assemblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an accident.

This should be done even if no damage

is visible. Additional questions concern-

ing seat belt operation should be directed

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

When you return the rear seatback

to its upright position after the rear

seatback has been folded down, be

careful not to damage the seat belt

webbing or buckle. Be sure that the

webbing or buckle does not get

caught or pinched in the rear seat.

A seat belt with damaged webbing

or buckle could possibly fail during

a collision or sudden stop, result-

ing in serious injury. If the webbing

or buckles are damaged, get them

replaced immediately.

WARNING

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your risk of serious or

fatal injuries in the event of a colli-

sion or sudden stop. The protection

of your restraint system (seat belts

and air bags) is greatly reduced by

reclining your seat. Seat belts must

be snug against your hips and

chest to work properly. The more

the seatback is reclined, the greater

the chance that an occupant's hips

will slide under the lap belt causing

serious internal injuries or the

occupant's neck could strike the

shoulder belt. Drivers and passen-

gers should always sit well back in

their seats, properly belted, and

with the seatbacks upright.

327

Safety features of your vehicle

Children riding in the car should sit in the

rear seat and must always be properly

restrained to minimise the risk of injury in

an accident, sudden stop or sudden

manoeuvre. According to accident statis-

tics, children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in the

front seat. Larger children not in a child

restraint should use one of the seat belts

provided.

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child and/or

infant safety seats must be properly

placed and installed in the rear seat. You

must use a commercially available child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Safety Standards of your

country.

Child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts

or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder

belt, or by a tether anchor and/or ISOFIX

anchors.

Children could be injured or killed in a

crash if their restraints are not properly

secured. For small children and babies, a

child seat or infant seat must be used.

Before buying a particular child restraint

system, make sure it fits your car seat

and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow

all the instructions provided by the man-

ufacturer when installing the child

restraint system.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNING

• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never

install a child or infant seat on the

front passenger's seat. Should an

accident occur and cause the

passenger-side air bag to deploy,

it could severely injure or kill an

infant or child seated in an infant

or child seat. Thus only use a

child restraint in the rear seat of

your vehicle.

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-

tem can become very hot if it is

left in a closed vehicle on a sunny

day, even if the outside tempera-

ture does not feel hot. Be sure to

check the seat cover and buckles

before placing a child there.

(Continued)

• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the lug-

gage area or fasten it with a seat

belt so that it will not be thrown

forward in the case of a sudden

stop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously injured

or killed by an inflating air bag.

All children, even those too large

for child restraints, must ride in

the rear seat.

Safety features of your vehicle

283

WARNING

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passen-

ger seat can be forcefully struck

by an inflating air bag resulting in

serious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the instructions for

installation and use of the child

restraint maker.

• Always make sure the child seat

is secured properly in the car and

your child is securely restrained

in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms or

lap when riding in a vehicle. The

violent forces created during a

crash will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-

self and a child. During a crash,

the belt could press deep into the

child causing serious internal

injuries.

(Continued)

• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle – not even for a short

time. The car can heat up very

quickly, resulting in serious

injuries to children inside. Even

very young children may inadver-

tently cause the vehicle to move,

entangle themselves in the win-

dows, or lock themselves or oth-

ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or any

two persons, to use the same

seat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-

sition themselves improperly.

Never let a child ride with the

shoulder belt under their arm or

behind their back. Always proper-

ly position and secure children in

rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up or

kneel on the seat or floorboard of

a moving vehicle. During a colli-

sion or sudden stop, the child

can be violently thrown against

the vehicles interior, resulting in

serious injury.

(Continued)

• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks"

over a seatback, it may not pro-

vide adequate security in an acci-

dent.

• Seat belts can become very hot,

especially when the car is parked

in direct sunlight. Always check

seat belt buckles before fasten-

ing them over a child.

329

Safety features of your vehicle

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of

a child seat or infant seat is required. This

child seat or infant seat should be of

appropriate size for the child and should

be installed in accordance with the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend that

the child restraint system is used in the

rear seats.

WARNING - Child seat

installation

• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not

properly restrained in the child

restraint. Before installing the

child restraint system, read the

instructions supplied by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operate

as described in this section, have

the system checked immediately

by a HYUNDAI authorised repair-

er.

• Failure to observe this manual's

instructions regarding child

restraint system and the instruc-

tions provided with the child

restraint system could increase

the risk and/or severity of injury

in an accident.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger

seat, because of the danger that an

inflating passenger-side air bag

could impact the rear-facing child

restraint and kill the child.

CRS09

OJC030037

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Safety features of your vehicle

303

Installing a child restraint system by

lap/shoulder belt

To install a child restraint system on the

outboard or centre rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder belt

around or through the restraint, follow-

ing the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-

bing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into

the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”

sound.

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat

belt to take up any slack. After installa-

tion of the child restraint system, try to

move it in all directions to be sure the

child restraint system is securely

installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pull more

webbing toward the retractor. When you

unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to

retract, the retractor will automatically

revert back to its normal seated passen-

ger emergency locking usage condition.

E2MS103005 MMSA3030E2BLD310

331

Safety features of your vehicle

Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt - For Europe

Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your

children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.

WARNING

We recommend that a child

restraint seat be installed in the

rear seat, even if the front passen-

ger's air bag ON/OFF switch is set

to the OFF position. To ensure the

safety of your child, the front pas-

senger’s air bag must be deactivat-

ed when it should be necessary to

install a child restraint seat on the

front passenger seat in exceptional

circumstances.

Front

Passenger

Rear

Outboard

Rear

Centre

Seating Position

U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group

Mass Group

0 : Up to 10 kg

UUU

(0 - 9 months)

0+ : Up to 13 kg

(0 - 2 years)

I :9 kg to 18 kg

(9 months - 4 years)

II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg

(4 - 12 years)

Safety features of your vehicle

323

Securing a child restraint seat with

“Tether Anchor” system

Child restraint hook holders are located

on the floor behind the rear seats.

1. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable head

restraint, route the tether strap under

the head restraint and between the

head restraint posts, otherwise route

the tether strap over the top of the

seatback.

2. If your vehicle is equipped with a lug-

gage board, set the board to the low-

est position.

3. Open the tether anchor cover.

4. Connect the tether strap hook to the

appropriate child restraint hook holder

and tighten to secure the seat.

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child

restraint to a single tether or to a

single lower anchorage point. The

increased load caused by multiple

seats may cause the tethers or

anchorage points to break, causing

serious injury or death.

WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not prop-

erly restrained in the child restraint.

Always follow the child seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

OJC030021

OYN039020

333

Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint system

with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether

Anchorage” system (if equipped)

ISOFIX is a standardized method of fit-

ting child seats that eliminates the need

to use the standard adult seat belt to

secure the seat in the vehicle. This

enables a much more secure and posi-

tive location with the added benefit of

easier and quicker installation.

An ISOFIX-seat may only be installed if it

has vehicle-specific or universal approval

in accordance with the requirements of

ECE-R 44.

❈ ISOFIX: International Standards Origanisation FIX

There are child restraint symbols located

on the lower portion of each side of the

rear seatbacks. These symbols indicate

the position of the lower anchors for child

restraints so equipped.

WARNING - Child restraint

check

Check that the child restraint sys-

tem is secure by pushing and

pulling it in different directions.

Incorrectly fitted child restraints

may swing, twist, tip or separate

causing death or serious injury.

WARNING - Child restraint

anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for

adult seat belts or harnesses or

for attaching other items or

equipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not work

properly if attached somewhere

other than the correct tether

anchor.

OJC030022

RSAE3090A

Safety features of your vehicle

343

Both rear outboard seats are equipped

with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well

as a corresponding top tether anchorage

on the back side of the back rest. The

ISOFIX anchorages are located between

seat cushion and back rest, marked with

the ISOFIX icon.

For installation, CRS ISOFIX connecters

have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX

anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check

potential visual indicators on the CRS

and cross-check by pulling).

CRS with universal approval to ECE-R

44 need to be fixed additionally with a top

tether strap connected to the correspon-

ding top tether anchorage point in the

back rest.

The installing and the use of a child-seat

has to be done according to the

installing-manual, which is added to the

ISOFIX-seat.

OJC030041

WARNING

Install the child restraint seat fully

rearward against the seatback with

the seatback inclined two positions

from the rearmost latched position.

WARNING

When using the vehicle's "ISOFIX"

system to install a child restraint

system in the rear seat, all unused

vehicle rear seat belt metal latch

plates or tabs must be latched

securely in their seat belt buckles

and the seat belt webbing must be

retracted behind the child restraint

to prevent the child from reaching

and taking hold of unretracted seat

belts. Unlatched metal latch plates

or tabs may allow the child to reach

the unretracted seat belts which

may result in strangulation and a

serious injury or death to the child

in the child restraint.

335

Safety features of your vehicle

To secure the child restraint seat:

1. To engage the child restraint seat to

the ISOFIX lower anchor, insert the

child restraint seat latch into the

ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audible

“click” sound.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

child restraint hook holder and tighten

to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-

ous page.)

WARNING

• Do not install a child restraint

seat at the centre of the rear seat

using the vehicle's ISOFIX

anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are

only provided for the left and right

outboard rear seating positions.

Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors

by attempting to attach a child

restraint seat in the middle of the

rear seat to the ISOFIX anchors.

In a crash, the child restraint seat

ISOFIX attachments may not be

strong enough to secure the child

restraint seat properly in the cen-

tre of the rear seat and may

break, causing serious injury or

death.

• Do not mount more than one

child restraint to a child restraint

lower anchorage point. The

improper increased load may

cause the anchorage points or

tether anchor to break, causing

serious injury or death.

(Continued)

• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-

patible child restraint seat only to

the appropriate locations shown

in the illustration.

• Always follow the installation and

use instructions provided by the

manufacturer of the child restraint.

CAUTION

Do not allow the rear seat belt web-

bing to get scratched or pinched by

the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX

anchor during the installation.

Safety features of your vehicle

363

Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe

F ISO/L1 - X X -

G ISO/L2 - X X -

E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -

D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -

C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -

D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -

C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -

B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -

B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -

A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -

Rear Outboard

(Passenger side)

Rear Outboard

(Driver side)

Front Passenger

FixtureSize ClassMass Group

Carrycot

0 : UP to 10kg

0+ : UP to 13kg

I : 9 to 18kg

Rear Centre

vehicle ISOFIX positions

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal

category approved for use in the mass group.

X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in

this mass group and/or this size class.

* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost

position of the passenger seat.

* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 720mm)

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height

650mm)

B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape

Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS

D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS

F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)

G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)

337

Safety features of your vehicle

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side impact air bag

(4) Curtain air bag

(5) Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF

switch

AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

WARNING

Even in vehicles with air bags, you

and your passengers must always

wear the safety belts provided in

order to minimise the risk and

severity of injury in the event of a

collision or rollover.

OYN039042R/OYN039026R

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Safety features of your vehicle

383

How does the air bag system

operate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON or START

position.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of

serious frontal or side collision in order

to help protect the occupants from seri-

ous physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the

air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate based upon the severity of a col-

lision and its direction. These two fac-

tors determine whether the sensors

produce an electronic deployment/

inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the densi-

ty and stiffness of the vehicles or

objects which your vehicle hits in the

collision. The determining, factors are

not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will sim-

ply see the deflated air bags hanging

out of their storage compartments after

the collision.

• In order to help provide protection in a

severe collision, the air bags must

inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag

inflation is a consequence of extreme-

ly short time in which a collision occurs

and the need to get the air bag

between the occupant and the vehicle

structures before the occupant impacts

those structures. This speed of inflation

reduces the risk of serious or life-

threatening injuries in a severe colli-

sion and is thus a necessary part of air

bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also

cause injuries which can include facial

abrasions, bruises and broken bones

because the inflation speed also caus-

es the air bags to expand with a great

deal of force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the steer-

ing wheel air bag can cause fatal

injuries, especially if the occupant

is positioned excessively close to

the steering wheel.

WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying air

bags in a collision, the driver

should sit as far back from the

steering wheel air bag as possible

(at least 250 mm (10 inches)

away). The front passenger should

always move their seat as far

back as possible and sit back in

their seat.

• Air bag inflates instantly in an

event of a collision, passengers

may be injured by the air bag

expansion force if they are not in

a proper position.

• Air bag inflation may cause

injuries including facial or bodily

abrasions, injuries from broken

glasses or burns.

339

Safety features of your vehicle

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a

loud noise and they leave smoke and

powder in the air inside of the vehicle.

This is normal and is a result of the igni-

tion of the air bag inflator. After the air

bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-

comfort in breathing due to the contact of

your chest with both the seat belt and the

air bag, as well as from breathing the

smoke and powder. Open your doors

and/or windows as soon as possible

after impact in order to reduce dis-

comfort and prevent prolonged expo-

sure to the smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are non-

toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin

(eyes, nose and throat, etc.). If this is the

case, wash and rinse with cold water

immediately and consult with the doctor if

the symptom persists.

Installing a child restraint on a front

passenger’s seat is forbidden when

the air bag is active

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in the front passenger's seat other than

that explained in section - Passenger's

front air bag ON/OFF switch. If the air

bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-

ing child restraint, causing serious or

fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child

restraints in the front passenger’s seat

either. If the front passenger air bag

inflates, it would cause serious or fatal

injuries to the child.

If your vehicle is equipped with the pas-

senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch,

you can activate or deactivate the front

passenger’s air bag when necessary.

1JBH3051

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air

bag related parts in the steering

wheel and/or instrument panel

and/or in both sides of the roof rails

above the front and rear doors are

very hot. To prevent injury, do not

touch the air bag storage areas

internal components immediately

after an air bag has inflated.

Safety features of your vehicle

403

For more details, please refer to 3-47

page.

Air bag warning and indicator

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warning light

in your instrument panel is to alert you of

a potential problem with your air bag -

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON,

the warning light should illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is

in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position.

WARNING

• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it!

• Never put a child restraint in the

front passenger's seat other than

that as mentioned in section -

Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF

switch. If the front passenger air

bag inflates, it would cause seri-

ous or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats of vehicle

equipped with side and/or curtain

air bags, be sure to install the

child restraint system as far away

from the door side as possible,

and securely lock the child

restraint system in position.

Inflation of side and/or curtain air

bags could cause serious injury

or death to an infant or child.

W7-147

341

Safety features of your vehicle

Passenger air bag ”ON” indi-

cator

The passenger's front air bag ON indica-

tor illuminates for approximately 4 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position.

The passenger's front air bag ON indica-

tor also comes on when the passenger's

front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the

ON position and goes off after approxi-

mately 60 seconds.

Passenger air bag “OFF” indi-

cator

The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-

cator illuminates for about 4 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position.

The front passenger’s air bag OFF indi-

cator also comes on when the passen-

ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch is set

to the OFF position and goes off when

the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF

switch is set to the ON position.

OJC030048

CAUTION

If the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the

passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-

cator will not illuminate (The pas-

senger's front air bag ON indicator

comes on and goes off after

approximately 60 seconds) and the

passenger’s front air bag will inflate

in a frontal impact even if the pas-

senger’s front air bag ON/OFF

switch is set to the OFF position.

If this occurs, have a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer inspect the pas-

senger’s front air bag ON/OFF

switch and the SRS air bag system

as soon as possible.

OJC030049

Safety features of your vehicle

423

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following com-

ponents:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side impact air bag modules

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side impact sensors

10. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF

indicator (front passenger's seat

only)

11. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF

switch (front passenger's seat only)

The SRSCM continuously monitors all

SRS components whilst the ignition

switch is ON to determine if a crash

impact is severe enough to require air

bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat

belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate for about

6 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, after which the

air bag warning light should go out.

WARNING

If any of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

of the SRS. Have a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer inspect the air bag

system as soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminat-

ing for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on whilst the

vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the ignition

switch is in ON position.

OAM039049R/Q

343

Safety features of your vehicle

The air bag modules are located both in

the centre of the steering wheel and in

the front passenger's panel above the

glove box. When the SRSCM detects a

sufficiently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically deploy

the front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams molded

directly into the pad covers will separate

under pressure from the expansion of the

air bags. Further opening of the covers

then allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination

with a properly worn seat belt, slows the

driver's or the passenger's forward

motion, reducing the risk of head and

chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling the

driver to maintain forward visibility and

the ability to steer or operate other con-

trols.

B240B01L/H

Driver’s front air bag (1)

B240B02L/H B240B03L/H

Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)

Safety features of your vehicle

443

Driver's and passenger's front air

bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System

and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver

and passenger seating positions.

WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a fine

dust released in the vehicle.

These conditions are normal and

are not hazardous - the air bags

are packed in this fine powder.

The dust generated during air

bag deployment may cause skin

or eye irritation as well as aggra-

vate asthma for some persons.

Always wash all exposed skin

areas thoroughly with lukewarm

water and a mild soap after an

accident in which the air bags

were deployed.

• The SRS can function only when

the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turn

the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the ignition

key. Never remove or replace the

air bag related fuse(s) when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion. Failure to heed this warning

will cause the SRS air bag warn-

ing light to illuminate.

OJC030024R

OJC030025R

■ Driver’s front air bag

■ Passenger’s front air bag

WARNING

• Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, cassette

holder, sticker, etc.) on the front

passenger's panel above the

glove box in a vehicle with a pas-

senger's air bag. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-

uid air freshener inside the vehi-

cle, do not place it near the

instrument cluster nor on the

instrument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous pro-

jectile and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L/H

Passenger’s front air bag

345

Safety features of your vehicle

The indications of the system's presence

are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on

the air bag pad cover in the steering

wheel and the passenger's side front

panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed

under the pad covers in the centre of the

steering wheel and the passenger's side

front panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt system alone in

case of a frontal impact of sufficient

severity.

(Continued)

• Front and side impact air bags

can injure occupants improperly

positioned in the front seats.

• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,

whilst still maintaining control of

the vehicle.

• You and your passengers should

never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags. Improperly

positioned drivers and passen-

gers can be severely injured by

inflating air bags.

• Never lean against the door or

centre console – always sit in an

upright position.

• Do not allow a passenger to ride

in the front seat when the pas-

senger’s front air bag OFF indica-

tor is illuminated, because the air

bag will not deploy in the event of

a moderate or severe frontal

crash.

(Continued)

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child

restraints – every trip, every time,

everyone! Air bags inflate with con-

siderable force and in the blink of

an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-

pants in proper position to obtain

maximum benefit from the air bag.

Even with air bags, improperly and

unbelted occupants can be severe-

ly injured when the air bag inflates.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant safety contained in this manu-

al.

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries and receive the maxi-

mum safety benefit from your

restraint system:

• Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat. NB

See section - Passenger's front

air bag ON/OFF switch.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safest

place for children of any age to

ride.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

463

(Continued)

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental deployment of the air bags

or by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If the SRS air bag warning light

remains illuminated or blinks

whilst the vehicle is being driven,

have a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer inspect the air bag sys-

tem as soon as possible.

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once –

have a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer replace the air bag imme-

diately after deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploy

the front air bags only when an

impact is sufficiently severe and

when the impact angle is less

than 30° from the forward longitu-

dinal axis of the vehicle.

Additionally, the air bags will only

deploy once. Seat belts must be

worn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-

impact or rollover crashes. In

addition, front air bags will not

deploy in frontal crashes below

the deployment threshold.

• A child restraint system must

never be placed in the front seat.

The infant or child could be

severely injured or killed by an air

bag deployment in case of an

accident. NB See section -

Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF

switch.

(Continued)

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he or

she must be properly belted and

the seat should be moved as far

back as possible.

• For maximum safety protection in

all types of crashes, all occu-

pants including the driver should

always wear their seat belts

whether or not an air bag is also

provided at their seating position

to minimise the risk of severe

injury or death in the event of a

crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-

sarily close to the air bag whilst

the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

347

Safety features of your vehicle

Passenger air bag “ON/OFF” switch

The passenger's front air bag can be

deactivated by the passenger's front air

bag ON/OFF switch. When switched off a

rearward facing child seat can be

installed in this seating position. When

using this facility the seat must always be

put in its most rearward position.

NB. For safety reasons, when installing

child seats within the vehicle the back

seat positions are preferred, such prac-

tice for installing a child seat in the front

passenger seat (with the Air Bag switch

positioned OFF) should only be used in

exceptional circumstances.

In addition the air bag can also be deac-

tivated if the front passenger's seat is

unoccupied by a person.

To deactivate or reactivate the passen-

ger’s front air bag:

To deactivate the passenger’s front air

bag, insert the master key into the pas-

senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch

and turn it to the OFF position. The pas-

senger’s front air bag OFF indicator ( )

will illuminate and stay on until the pas-

senger’s front air bag is reactivated.

To reactivate the passenger’s front air

bag, insert the master key into the pas-

senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch

and turn it to the ON position. The pas-

senger’s front air bag OFF indicator will

go out and the passenger’s front air bag

ON indicator ( ) will illuminate for

approximately 60 seconds.

(Continued)

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatal

injury in a crash. All occupants

should sit upright with the seat

back in an upright position, cen-

tred on the seat cushion with

their seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and their feet on

the floor until the vehicle is

parked and the ignition key is

removed.

• The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provide

protection in a crash. If an occu-

pant is out of position because of

not wearing a seat belt, the air

bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fatal

injuries.

OYN039027R OJC030051

Safety features of your vehicle

483

✽

NOTICE

• When the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position,

the passenger’s front air bag is activated

and child or infant seat should not be

installed on the front passenger seat.

• When the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF posi-

tion, the passenger’s front air bag is

deactivated.

CAUTION

• If the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch is not working

properly, the air bag warning light

()

on the instrument panel will

illuminate.

And, the passenger's front air bag

OFF indicator

()

will not illumi-

nate (The passenger's front air

bag ON indicator comes on and

goes off after approximately 60

seconds), the SRS Control

Module reactivate the passen-

ger’s front air bag and the pas-

senger’s front air bag will inflate

in frontal impact crashes even if

the passenger’s front air bag

ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF

position.

If this occurs, have a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer inspect the

passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF

switch, the pre-tensioner seat belt

system and the SRS air bag sys-

tem as soon as possible.

(Continued)

• If the SRS air bag warning light

blinks or does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position, or if it illumi-

nates whilst the vehicle is being

driven, have a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer inspect the passen-

ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch,

pre-tensioner seat belt and the

SRS air bag system as soon as

possible.

WARNING

On some models, the front air bag

ON/OFF switch could turn by using

a similar small rigid device. Always

check the status of the front air bag

ON/OFF switch and passenger's

front air bag ON/OFF indicator.

349

Safety features of your vehicle

Side impact air bag

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

impact air bag in each front seat. The

purpose of the air bag is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt alone.

(Continued)

• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the passenger's

front air bag ON/OFF switch, do

not install a child restraint sys-

tem in the front passenger's seat.

A child restraint system must

never be placed in the front seat

other than that explained in sec-

tion - Passenger's front air bag

ON/OFF switch. Children who are

too large for child restraint sys-

tems should always occupy the

rear seat and use the available

lap/shoulder belts. Children are

afforded the most safety in the

event of an accident when they

are restrained by a proper

restraint system in the rear seat.

• As soon as the child seat is no

longer needed on the front pas-

senger's seat, reactivate the front

passenger's air bag.

WARNING

• The driver is responsible for the

proper position of the passen-

ger’s front air bag ON/OFF

switch.

• Deactivate the passenger's front

air bag only when the ignition

switch is switched off, or the mal-

function may occur in the SRS

Control Module.

And there may be a danger that

the driver's and/or front passen-

ger’s and/or side and curtain air

bag may fail to trigger, or not trig-

ger correctly during a collision.

• Never install a rearward facing

child seat on the front passen-

ger's seat unless the passenger's

front air bag has been deactivat-

ed. The infant or child could be

severely injured or killed by an air

bag deployment in case of an

accident.

(Continued)

OED036107

OJC030029

Safety features of your vehicle

503

The side impact air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side-impact

collisions, depending on the crash sever-

ity, angle, speed and point of impact. The

side impact air bags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact situations.

(Continued)

• Do not install any accessories on

the side or near the side impact

air bag.

• Do not place any objects over the

air bag or between the air bag

and yourself.

• Do not place any objects (an

umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dan-

gerous projectiles and cause

injury if the supplemental side

impact air bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-

ment of the side impact air bag

that may result in personal injury,

avoid impact to the side impact

sensor when the ignition switch

is on.

• If seat or seat cover is damaged,

have the vehicle checked and

repaired by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer. Inform the dealer

that your vehicle is equipped with

side impact air bags.

WARNING

• The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver's and the

passenger's seat belt systems

and is not a substitute for them.

Therefore your seat belts must be

worn at all times whilst the vehi-

cle is in motion. The air bags

deploy only in certain side impact

conditions severe enough to

cause significant injury to the

vehicle occupants.

• For best protection from the side

impact air bag system and to

avoid being injured by the

deploying side impact air bag,

both front seat occupants should

sit in an upright position with the

seat belt properly fastened. The

driver's hands should be placed

on the steering wheel at the 9:00

and 3:00 positions. The passen-

ger's arms and hands should be

placed on their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seat

covers.

• Use of seat covers could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness of

the system.

(Continued)

351

Safety features of your vehicle

Curtain air bag

Curtain air bags are located along both

sides of the roof rails above the front and

rear doors.

They are designed to help protect the

heads of the front seat occupants and

the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-

tain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side impact

collisions, depending on the crash sever-

ity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain

air bags are not designed to deploy in all

side impact situations, collisions from the

front or rear of the vehicle or in most

rollover situations.

WARNING

• In order for side impact and cur-

tain air bags to provide the best

protection, both front seat occu-

pants and both outboard rear

occupants should sit in an

upright position with the seat

belts properly fastened.

Importantly, children should sit in

a proper child restraint system in

the rear seat.

(Continued)

• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats, they must be

seated in the proper child

restraint system. Make sure to

put the child restraint system as

far away from the door side as

possible, and secure the child

restraint system in a locked posi-

tion.

• Do not allow the passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors, stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects

between the doors and passen-

gers when they are seated on

seats equipped with side and/or

curtain air bags.

• Never try to open or repair any

components of the side curtain

air bag system. This should only

be done by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Failure to follow the above men-

tioned instructions can result in

injury or death to the vehicle occu-

pants in an accident.

OED036098

OYN039043

Safety features of your vehicle

523

Air bag system operation (deploy-

ment/non deployment)

There are many types of situations in

which an air bag would not provide

additional protection to the vehicle

occupants.

These include rear impacts, second or

third collisions in multiple impact

accidents, low speed impacts, offset

collisions and vehicle roll over. It is

therefore important to understand

that the level of damage suffered by a

vehicle as a result of impact is not

indicative of whether air bag deploy-

ment was warranted by a primary, or

subsequent, impact.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor

OED030079/OYN039030/H/OJC030031/1LDA2054

353

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a

frontal collision depending on the intensi-

ty, speed or angles of impact of the front

collision.

WARNING

• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air

bag deployment, which could

result in serious personal injury

or death.

• If the installation location or

angle of the sensors is altered in

any way, the air bags may deploy

when they should not or they may

not deploy when they should,

causing severe injury or death.

Therefore, do not try to perform

maintenance on or around the air

bag sensors. Have the vehicle

checked and repaired by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changed

due to the deformation of the

front bumper, body or B pillar

where side collision sensors are

installed. Have the vehicle

checked and repaired by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Your vehicle has been designed

to absorb impact and deploy the

air bag(s) in certain collisions.

Installing aftermarket bumper

guards or replacing a bumper

with non-genuine parts may

adversely affect your vehicles

collision and air bag deployment

performance.

OED036096/H

Safety features of your vehicle

543

Side air bags

Side air bags (side impact and/or curtain

air bags) are designed to inflate when an

impact is detected by side collision sen-

sors depending on the strength, speed or

angles of impact resulting from a side

impact collision.

Although the front air bags (driver’s and

front passenger’s air bags) are designed

to inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of colli-

sions if the front impact sensors detect a

sufficient impact. Side air bags (side

impact and/or curtain air bags) are

designed to inflate only in side impact

collisions, but they may inflate in other

collisions if the side impact sensors

detect a sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved roads

or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive

carefully on unimproved roads or on sur-

faces not designed for vehicle traffic to

prevent unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags are

designed not to deploy in such cases

because they may not provide benefits

beyond the protection of the seat belts

in such collisions.

OJC030054

OED036098

OED036099/H

355

Safety features of your vehicle

• Frontal air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because occu-

pants are moved backward by the

force of the impact. In this case, inflat-

ed air bags would not be able to pro-

vide any additional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move to the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

However, side impact or curtain air

bags may inflate depending on the

intensity, vehicle speed and angles of

impact.

• In a slant or angled collision, the force

of impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would not

be able to provide any additional bene-

fit, and thus the sensors may not

deploy any air bags.

OJC030053 OED036102OED036100/H

Safety features of your vehicle

563

• Just before impact, drivers often brake

heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the

front portion of the vehicle causing it to

“ride” under a vehicle with a higher

ground clearance. Air bags may not

inflate in this "under-ride" situation

because deceleration forces that are

detected by sensors may be signifi-

cantly reduced by such “under-ride”

collisions.

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-

dents because air bag deployment

would not provide protection to the

occupants.

However, side and/or curtain air bags

may inflate when the vehicle is rolled

over by a side impact collision, if the

vehicle is equipped with side impact air

bags and curtain air bags.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated and the colli-

sion energy is absorbed by the vehicle

structure.

OED036103 OED036104 OJC030053

357

Safety features of your vehicle

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free

and so there are no parts you can safely

service by yourself. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not illuminate, or con-

tinuously remains on, have your vehicle

immediately inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as

removing, installing, repairing, or any

work on the steering wheel, the front

passenger's panel, front seats and roof

rails must be performed by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer. Improper handling of

the SRS system may result in serious

personal injury.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the addition

of any kind of badges to the pad

covers or modifications to the

body structure, can adversely

affect SRS performance and lead

to possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-

ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or

one which has been moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely affect

the air bag covers and proper

deployment of the system.

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

• If the air bags inflate, they must

be replaced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring, or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental inflation of the air bags or

by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-

tem must be discarded, or if the

vehicle must be scrapped, certain

safety precautions must be

observed. A HYUNDAI authorised

repairer knows these precautions

and can give you the necessary

information. Failure to follow

these precautions and proce-

dures could increase the risk of

personal injury.

• If your car was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on the

floor, you shouldn't try to start

the engine; have the car towed to

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Safety features of your vehicle

583

Additional safety precautions

• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-

down back seat. All occupants should

sit upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor.

• Passengers should not move out of

or change seats whilst the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not wear-

ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-

gency stop can be thrown against the

inside of the vehicle, against other

occupants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed to

restrain one occupant. If more than

one person uses the same seat belt,

they could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the seat

belt can reduce the protection provided

by the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place hard

or sharp objects between them-

selves and the air bags. Carrying

hard or sharp objects on your lap or in

your mouth can result in injuries if an

air bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from the air

bag covers. All occupants should sit

upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor. If occupants are too close to the

air bag covers, they could be injured if

the air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects on or

near the air bag covers. Any object

attached to or placed on the front or

side impact air bag covers could inter-

fere with the proper operation of the air

bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components or side impact air bags.

• Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the operation

of the supplemental restraint system

sensing components and wiring har-

nesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on your

lap. The infant or child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in the event of a

crash. All infants and children should

be properly restrained in appropriate

child safety seats or seat belts in the

rear seat.

Adding equipment to or modifying

your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to be

shifted too close to a deploying

air bag, strike the interior struc-

ture or be thrown from the vehicle

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tred on the seat cushion with

your seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and your feet on

the floor.

359

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning label is attached to alert

the passengers of potential risk of the air

bag system.

Note that these government warnings

focus on the risk of children, we also

want you to be aware of the risks which

adults are exposed to that have been

described in previous pages.

OYN039033

■ Type A

■ Type B

Keys / 4-2

Remote keyless entry / 4-5

Smart key / 4-8

Theft-alarm system / 4-11

Door locks / 4-13

Tailgate / 4-17

Windows / 4-19

Bonnet / 4-24

Fuel filler lid / 4-26

Panorama sunroof / 4-29

Steering wheel / 4-33

Mirrors / 4-35

Instrument cluster / 4-40

Rear parking assist system / 4-63

Rearview camera / 4-67

Hazard warning flasher / 4-68

Lighting / 4-69

Wipers and washers / 4-75

Interior light / 4-79

Defroster / 4-80

Manual climate control system / 4-81

Automatic climate control system / 4-90

Windscreen defrosting and defogging / 4-98

Storage compartment / 4-100

Interior features / 4-103

Audio system / 4-111

Features of your vehicle

Record your key number

The key code number is

stamped on the bar

code tag attached to the

key set. Should you

lose your keys, this

number will enable a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer to duplicate the keys easi-

ly. Remove the bar code tag and store it

in a safe place. Also, record the code

number and keep it in a safe place (not in

the vehicle).

Key operations

• Used to start the engine.

• Used to lock and unlock the doors.

Type B

To unfold the key, press the release but-

ton then the key will unfold automatically.

To fold the key, fold the key manually

whilst pressing the release button.

Type C

To remove the mechanical key, press and

hold the release button and remove the

mechanical key.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the

key into the hole and push it until a click

sound is heard.

KEYS

CAUTION

Do not fold the key without press-

ing the release button. This may

damage the key.

OFD047001-B

■ Type A

■ Type B

OXM049200L

■ Type C

OAM049096L

Features of your vehicle

Immobiliser system

Your vehicle may be equipped with an

electronic engine immobiliser system to

reduce the risk of unauthorised vehicle

use.

Your immobiliser system is comprised of

a small transponder in the ignition key

and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobiliser system, whenever

you insert your ignition key into the igni-

tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks

and determines and verifies if the ignition

key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the

engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the

engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobiliser sys-

tem:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-

der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobiliser system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

The immobiliser system activates auto-

matically. Without a valid ignition key for

your vehicle, the engine will not start.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

immobiliser password is a cus-

tomer unique password and should

be kept confidential. Do not leave

this number anywhere in your vehi-

cle.

WARNING - Ignition key

Leaving children unattended in a

vehicle with the ignition key is dan-

gerous even if the key is not in the

ignition switch. Children copy

adults and they could place the key

in the ignition switch. The ignition

key would enable children to oper-

ate power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in serious

bodily injury or even death. Never

leave the keys in your vehicle with

unsupervised children.

WARNING

Use only HYUNDAI original parts

for the ignition key in your vehicle.

If an aftermarket key is used, the

ignition switch may not return to

ON after START. If this happens,

the starter will continue to operate

causing damage to the starter

motor and possible fire due to

excessive current in the wiring.

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

The immobiliser system detects the

presence of a key in the ignition switch.

To ensure the system performs correct-

ly, the keys should be separated after

delivery of the vehicle so that only one

key is near the ignition switch when

using the vehicle. The engine may not

start or may stop shortly after starting if

more than one key is near the ignition

switch.

✽

NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your

keys, consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

CAUTION

The transponder in your ignition

key is an important part of the

immobiliser system. It is designed

to give years of trouble-free service,

however you should avoid expo-

sure to moisture, static electricity

and rough handling. Immobiliser

system malfunction could occur.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

immobiliser system because it

could cause the immobiliser sys-

tem to malfunction and should only

be serviced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the immobiliser system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer warranty.

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near

the ignition switch.

The engine may not start for the

metal accessories may interrupt the

transponder signal from normally

transmitting.

Features of your vehicle

Remote keyless entry system

operations

Lock (1)

All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the

lock button is pressed.

If all doors are closed, the hazard warn-

ing lights blink once to indicate that all

doors (and tailgate) are locked. If any

door (or tailgate) is opened when the lock

button is pressed, all doors will not lock.

Unlock (2)

All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if

the unlock button is pressed.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

to indicate that all doors (and tailgate)

are unlocked.

After depressing this button, the doors

(and tailgate) will lock automatically

unless you open any door within 30 sec-

onds.

Tailgate unlock (3, if equipped)

The tailgate is unlocked if the button is

pressed for more than 1 second.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.

After pressing this button, the tailgate will

lock automatically unless you open the

tailgate within 30 seconds.

Also, once the tailgate is opened and

then closed, the tailgate will lock auto-

matically.

❈ The word “HOLD” is written on the but-

ton to inform you that you must press

and hold the button for 1 second.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OAM049097L

OXM049001L

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

Transmitter precautions

✽

NOTICE

The transmitter may not work if any of

following occur:

• The ignition key is in ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).

• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work

properly, open and close the door with

the ignition key. If you have a problem

with the transmitter, contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Battery replacement

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-

tery which will normally last for several

years. When replacement is necessary,

use the following procedure.

OED039003A

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from

water or any liquid. If the keyless

entry system is inoperative due to

exposure to water or liquids, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er vehicle warranty.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to

changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter centre

cover (1).

2. Replace the battery with a new one.

When replacing the battery, make sure

the battery positive “+” symbol faces

up as indicated in the illustration.

3. Install the rear cover.

For transmitter replacement, see a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer to repro-

gram the transmitter.

CAUTION

• The keyless entry system trans-

mitter is designed to give you

years of trouble-free use, howev-

er it can malfunction if exposed to

moisture or static electricity. If

you are unsure how to use your

transmitter or replace the battery,

contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

• Using the wrong battery can

cause the transmitter to malfunc-

tion. Be sure to use the correct

battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmit-

ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or

expose it to heat or sunlight.

CAUTION

An inappropriately disposed bat-

tery can be harmful to the environ-

ment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to

your local law(s) or regulation.

Features of your vehicle

With a smart key, you can lock or unlock

the doors (and tailgate) and even start

the engine without inserting the key.

The functions of the buttons on a smart

key are similar to the remote keyless

entry. (Refer to the “Remote keyless

entry” in this section.)

Smart key functions

Carrying the smart key, you may lock and

unlock the vehicle doors (and tailgate).

Also, you may start the engine. Refer to

the following, for more details.

Locking

Pressing the button of the front outside

door handles with all doors (and tailgate)

closed and any door unlocked, locks all

the doors (and tailgate). The hazard

warning lights will blink once to indicate

that all doors (and tailgate) are locked.

The button will only operate when the

smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the

outside door handle. If you want to make

sure that a door has locked or not, you

should check if indicator on the central

door lock/unlock switch has illuminated

or pull the outside door handle.

Even though you press the button, the

doors will not lock and the chime will

sound if any of the following occurs:

• The smart key is in the vehicle.

• The ENGINE START/STOP button is in

the ACC or ON position.

• Any door except the tailgate is opened.

Unlocking

Pressing the button of the front outside

door handles with all doors (and tailgate)

closed and locked, unlocks all the doors

(and tailgate). The hazard warning lights

will blink twice to indicate that all doors

(and tailgate) are unlocked. The button

will only operate when the smart key is

within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the outside

door handle.

When the smart key is recognized in the

area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from the front out-

side door handle, other people can also

open a door without possession of the

smart key.

SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)

OXM049001L OYN049005/H

Features of your vehicle

Tailgate unlocking

If you are within 0.7 m (28 in.) from the

outside tailgate handle, with your smart

key in possession, the tailgate will unlock

and open when you press the tailgate

handle switch.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.

Also, once the tailgate is opened and

then closed, the tailgate will lock auto-

matically.

Start-up

You can start the engine without inserting

the key. For detailed information refer to

“Starting the engine with a smart key” in

section 5.

Smart key precautions

✽

NOTICE

• If, for some reason, you happen to lose

your smart key, you will not be able to

start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if

necessary, and contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be

registered to a single vehicle. If you

lose a smart key, you should immedi-

ately take the vehicle and key to a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer to

protect it from potential theft.

• The smart key will not work if any of

the following occurs:

- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the smart key.

- The smart key is near a mobile two-

way radio system or a mobile phone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is being

operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work

properly, open and close the door with

the mechanical key. If you have a

problem with the smart key, contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

Keep the smart key away from

water or any liquid. If the keyless

entry system is inoperative due to

exposure to water or liquids, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

Features of your vehicle

104

Battery replacement

A smart key battery should last for sever-

al years, but if the smart key is not work-

ing properly, try to replace the battery

with a new one. If you are unsure how to

use your smart key or replace the bat-

tery, contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

✽

NOTICE

The circuit inside the smart key can have

a problem if exposed to moisture or stat-

ic electricity. If you are unsure how to

use your smart key or replace the bat-

tery, contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart

key.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery

(CR2032). When replacing the battery,

make sure the battery positive “+” sym-

bol faces up as indicated in the illus-

tration.

3. Install the rear cover.

✽

NOTICE

• Using the wrong battery can cause the

smart key to malfunction. Be sure to

use the correct battery.

• Circuits inside the smart key may

develop problems when dropped,

exposed to moisture or static electrici-

ty.

• If you suspect that your smart key

might have sustained some damage,

or you feel your smart key is not

working correctly, contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

OHM048005

CAUTION

An inappropriately disposed bat-

tery can be harmful to the environ-

ment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to

your local law(s) or regulation.

411

Features of your vehicle

Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm sys-

tem will have a label attached to the vehi-

cle with the following words:

1. WARNING

2. SECURITY SYSTEM

This system is designed to provide pro-

tection from unauthorized entry into the

car. This system is operated in three

stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the

second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and

the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-

gered, the system provides an audible

alarm with blinking of the hazard warning

lights.

Armed stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

the system as described below.

1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-

tion switch and exit the vehicle.

2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)

and the engine bonnet are closed and

latched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of

the keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the

hazard warning lights will blink once to

indicate that the system is armed.

If any door (or tailgate) or engine bonnet

remains open, the hazard warning lights

will not blink and the theft-alarm will not

arm. If all doors (and tailgate) and engine

bonnet are closed after the lock button is

pressed, the hazard warning lights blink

once.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armed

stage

Theft-alarm

stage

Disarmed

stage

OJC040170

Features of your vehicle

124

Do not arm the system until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

system is armed whilst a passen-

ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the

alarm may be activated when the

remaining passenger(s) leave the

vehicle. If any door (or tailgate) or

engine bonnet is opened within 30

seconds after the system enters the

armed stage, the system is disarmed

to prevent unnecessary alarm.

Theft-alarm stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the

following occurs whilst the system is

armed.

• A front or rear door is opened without

using the transmitter (or smart key).

• The tailgate is opened without using

the transmitter (or smart key).

• The engine bonnet is opened.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning lights will blink continuously for

27 seconds, unless the system is dis-

armed. To turn off the system, unlock the

doors with the transmitter (or smart key).

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when:

Transmitter

- The door unlock button is pressed.

- The engine is started. (within 3 sec-

onds)

- The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion for 30 seconds or more.

Smart key

- The door unlock button is pressed.

- The button of the front outside door is

pressed whilst carrying the smart key.

- The engine is started. (within 3 sec-

onds)

After the doors are unlocked, the hazard

warning lights will blink twice to indicate

that the system is disarmed.

After pressing the unlock button, if any

door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30

seconds, the system will be rearmed.

✽

NOTICE - Immobiliser system

• If the system is not disarmed with the

transmitter, insert the key into the

ignition switch and start the engine.

Then the system will be disarmed.

• If you lose your keys, consult your

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

theft-alarm system because it could

cause the theft-alarm system to

malfunction and should only be

serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the theft-alarm system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer’s warranty.

413

Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from out-

side the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the front

of the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock/unlock the door with a key,

all vehicle doors will lock/unlock auto-

matically. (if equipped)

• Doors can also be locked and

unlocked with the transmitter or smart

key. (if equipped)

• Once the doors are unlocked, they may

be opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that doors are

closed securely.

✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operating

temporarily in order to protect the

circuit and prevent damage to system

components.

In case of an emergency

If the power door lock switch does not

operate electrically, the only way to lock

the door(s) is with the ignition key from

the outside key hole.

Doors without the outside key hole, you

can lock the door as follows:

1. Open the door.

2. Insert the key into the emergency door

lock hole and turn the key horizontally

to lock.

3. Close the door securely.

Once the tailgate is closed when the

power door lock switch does not operate

electrically, you will not be able to open

the tailgate.

DOOR LOCKS

OJC040110

Lock

OYN049006/H

Lock

Unlock

Features of your vehicle

144

Operating door locks from inside

the vehicle

With the door handle

If the inner door handle is pulled once

when the door is locked, the door will

unlock.

If the inner door handle is pulled twice,

the door will open.

Inside handle override

(Front door, if equipped)

If the inner door handle is pulled when

the door is locked, the door will unlock

and open.

Inside handle central door unlock

(Front door, if equipped)

If the inner door handle is pulled when all

door are locked, all doors will unlock.

With central door lock/unlock switch

It is operated by pressing the door

lock/unlock switch.

• When you press the door lock/unlock

switch, all vehicle doors will lock and

the indicator light on the switch will illu-

minate for approximately 60 seconds

(If the key is in the ignition switch, the

indicator light on the switch will conti-

nusouly illuminate).

If any door is opened when the switch

is pressed, all doors will not lock.

• If any door is unlocked, the indicator of

the door lock switch will blink. If you

press the switch when the indicator

blinks, all doors will lock.

• When you press the door lock/unlock

switch again, all vehicle doors will

unlock and the indicator light on the

switch will not illuminate.

✽

NOTICE

If the doors are locked with the tranmit-

ter or smart key, the doors cannot be

unlocked with the central door lock/

unlock switch. (if equipped)

OJC040008R OJC040009

WARNING - Door lock mal-

function

If a power door lock ever fails to

function whilst you are in the vehi-

cle, try one or more of the follow-

ing:

• Operate the other door locks and

handles.

• Lower the driver’s window and

use the key to unlock the door

from outside.

• Move to the cargo area and open

the tailgate.

415

Features of your vehicle

Impact sensing door unlock sys-

tem (if equipped)

All doors will automatically unlock when

an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock system

(if equipped)

All doors will automatically lock after the

vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).

For deactivation of this feature, contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Engine off door unlock system

(if equipped)

All doors will be automatically unlock:

Without smart key system

When the key is removed from the igni-

tion switch.

With smart key system

When the ENGINE START/STOP button

is in the OFF position.

For deactivation of this feature, contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Unlocked

vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can

invite theft or possible harm to you

or others from someone hiding in

your vehicle whilst you are gone.

Always remove the ignition key,

engage the parking brake, close all

windows and lock all doors when

leaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattended

children

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

severe injury to unattended chil-

dren or animals who cannot escape

the vehicle. Furthermore, children

might operate features of the vehi-

cle that could injure them, or they

could encounter other harm, possi-

bly from someone gaining entry to

the vehicle. Never leave children or

animals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors

• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked whilst the

vehicle is in motion to prevent

accidental opening of the door.

Locked doors will also discour-

age potential intruders when the

vehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doors

and watch for vehicles, motorcy-

cles, bicycles or pedestrians

approaching the vehicle in the

path of the door. Opening a door

when something is approaching

can cause damage or injury.

Features of your vehicle

164

Deadlock system (if equipped)

Some vehicles are equipped with a

deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent

opening a door from either inside or out-

side the vehicle once the deadlocks have

been activated providing an additional

measure of vehicle security.

To lock the vehicle by using the deadlock

function, the doors must be locked by

using the transmitter or the smart key. To

unlock the vehicle, the transmitter or

smart key must be used again.

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help

prevent children from accidentally open-

ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.

The rear door safety locks should be

used whenever children are in the vehi-

cle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located on

the rear edge of the door to the lock

( ) position. When the child safety

lock is in the lock position, the rear

door will not open even though the

inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside

door handle (1).

Even though the doors may be unlocked,

the rear door will not open by pulling the

inner door handle (2) until the rear door

child safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING - Rear door

locks

If children accidentally open the

rear doors whilst the vehicle is in

motion, they could fall out and be

severely injured or killed. To pre-

vent children from opening the rear

doors from inside, the rear door

safety locks should be used when-

ever children are in the vehicle.

OYN049007

WARNING

Do not lock the doors with the

transmitter or smart key with any-

body left in the vehicle. The pas-

senger in the vehicle cannot unlock

the doors. For example, if the door

is locked with the transmitter, the

passenger in the vehicle cannot

unlock the door without the trans-

mitter.

417

Features of your vehicle

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked

when all doors are locked or unlocked

with the key, transmitter, smart key or

central door lock/unlock switch.

• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail-

gate unlock button on the transmitter or

smart key is pressed (if equipped).

If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened

by pressing the handle and pulling it

up.

Once the tailgate is opened and then

closed, the tailgate is locked automati-

cally.

✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates door lock and

door mechanisms may not work prop-

erly due to freezing conditions.

• When jacking up the vehicle to

change a tyre or repair the vehicle, do

not operate the tailgate. This could

cause the tailgate to close improperly.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push

down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that

the tailgate is securely latched.

TAILGATE

OJC040010

WARNING

• Do not put any object on the cov-

ering shelf. If the vehicle sudden-

ly stops or makes a curve, the

object may injure passengers.

• Watch out for the edge of the cov-

ering shelf, when you are using

the luggage room. You may injure

yourself.

CAUTION

Do not put any heavy object on the

covering shelf. It may damage the

covering shelf.

WARNING - Exhaust

fumes

If you drive with the tailgate open,

you will draw dangerous exhaust

fumes into your vehicle which can

cause serious injury or death to

vehicle occupants.

If you must drive with the tailgate

open, keep the air vents and all win-

dows open so that additional out-

side air comes into the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargo

area

Occupants should never ride in the

rear cargo area where no restraints

are available. To avoid injury in the

event of an accident or sudden

stops, occupants should always be

properly restrained.

Features of your vehicle

184

Emergency tailgate safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-

gency tailgate safety release lever locat-

ed on the bottom of the tailgate. When

someone is inadvertently locked in the

luggage compartment, the tailgate can

be opened by pushing the release lever

and pushing the tailgate.

Luggage room lamp

Luggage room lamp turns on when the

tailgate is opened. It remains on until the

tailgate is securely closed.

✽

NOTICE

Make sure to close the tailgate securely.

If it remains open whilst engine is not

running, it may cause battery discharge

because luggage room lamp remains on.

WARNING

• For emergency, be fully aware of

the location of the emergency

tailgate safety release lever in

this vehicle and how to open the

tailgate if you are accidentally

locked in the luggage compart-

ment.

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the luggage compartment

of the vehicle at any time. The

luggage compartment is a very

dangerous location in the event

of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emer-

gency only. Use extreme caution,

especially whilst the vehicle is in

motion.

OYN049012OJC040011

419

Features of your vehicle

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch

(3) Rear door (right) power window

switch*

(4) Rear door (left) power window

switch*

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window*

(7) Power window lock switch*

* if equipped

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power win-

dows may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

WINDOWS

OJC040013R

Features of your vehicle

204

Power windows

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window switch

that controls the door's window. The driv-

er has a master power window switch

that controls all the windows in the vehi-

cle. Also, a power window lock switch

which that can block the operation of rear

passenger windows. The power windows

can be operated for approximately 30

seconds after the ignition key is removed

or turned to the ACC or LOCK position.

However, if the front doors are opened,

the power windows cannot be operated

within the 30 seconds period.

✽

NOTICE

Whilst driving with the rear windows

down or with the sunroof (if equipped)

opened (or partially opened), your vehi-

cle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or

pulsation noise. This noise is a normal

occurrence and can be reduced or elim-

inated by taking the following actions.

If the noise occurs with one or both of

the rear windows down, partially lower

both front windows approximately one

inch. If you experience the noise with

the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size

of the sunroof opening

Window opening and closing

Type A

To open or close a window, press down

or pull up the front portion of the corre-

sponding switch to the first detent posi-

tion (5).

OYN049136R

■ Type A

421

Features of your vehicle

Type B - Auto down window (if equipped)

Pressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent posi-

tion (6) completely lowers the window

even when the switch is released. To stop

the window at the desired position whilst

the window is in operation, pull up the

switch momentarily to the opposite direc-

tion of the window movement.

Type C - Auto up/down window

(if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window

switch momentarily to the second detent

position (6) completely lowers or lifts the

window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position whilst the window is in

operation, pull up or press down and

release the switch.

If the power window does not operate

normally, the automatic power window

system must be reset as follows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Close the window and continue pulling

up the power window switch for at

least 1 second after the window is

completely closed.

Automatic reversal (if equipped)

If the upward movement of the window is

blocked by an object or part of the body,

the window will detect the resistance and

will stop upward movement. The window

will then lower approximately 12 in. (30

cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

whilst the power window switch is pulled

up continuously, the window will stop

upward movement then lower approxi-

mately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the power

window switch is pulled up continuously

again within 5 seconds after the window

is lowered by the automatic window

reversal feature, the automatic window

reversal will not operate.

OYN049137R

■ Type B

OYN049138R

■ Type C

OUN026013/H

Features of your vehicle

224

✽

NOTICE

The automatic reverse feature for the

window is only active when the “auto

up” feature is used by fully pulling up

the switch. The automatic reverse fea-

ture will not operate if the window is

raised using the halfway position on the

power window switch.

Power window lock switch

The driver can disable the power window

switches on the rear door by pressing the

power window lock switch located on the

driver’s door to the LOCK position

(pressed).

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do not

open or close two windows or

more at the same time. This will

also ensure the longevity of the

fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposite directions at

the same time. If this is done, the

window will stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

WARNING

Always check for obstructions

before raising any window to avoid

injuries or vehicle damage. If an

object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in

diameter is caught between the

window glass and the upper win-

dow channel, the automatic reverse

window may not detect the resist-

ance and will not stop and reverse

direction.

OJC040017R

423

Features of your vehicle

Manual windows (if equipped)

To raise or lower the window, turn the

window regulator handle clockwise or

counterclockwise.

WARNING - Windows

• NEVER leave the ignition key in

the vehicle.

• NEVER leave any child unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Even very

young children may inadvertently

cause the vehicle to move, entan-

gle themselves in the windows,

or otherwise injure themselves or

others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head and

other obstructions are safely out

of the way before closing a win-

dow.

• Do not allow children to play with

the power windows. Keep the dri-

ver’s door power window lock

switch in the LOCK position

(pressed). Serious injury can

result from unintentional window

operation by the child.

• Do not extend face or arms out-

side the window opening whilst

driving.

OED036088/H

WARNING

When opening or closing the win-

dows, make sure your passenger's

arms, hands and body are safely

out of the way.

Features of your vehicle

244

Opening the bonnet

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

bonnet. The bonnet should pop open

slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the

bonnet slightly, pull the secondary

latch inside of the bonnet centre and

lift the bonnet.

3.Pull out the support rod from the bon-

net.

4.Hold the bonnet opened with the sup-

port rod.

BONNET

WARNING - Hot parts

Be very careful not to touch the

support rod when the engine and

parts are hot. You could get burned

or get seriously injured.

OYN049018R

OJC040019 OYN049020

425

Features of your vehicle

Closing the bonnet

1. Before closing the bonnet, check the

following:

• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed

from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the bonnet until it is about 12 in.

(30 cm) above the closed position and

let it drop. Make sure that it locks into

place.

WARNING

• Before closing the bonnet,

ensure that all obstructions are

removed from the bonnet open-

ing. Closing the bonnet with an

obstruction present in the bonnet

opening may result in property

damage or severe personal

injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or any

other combustible material in the

engine compartment. Doing so

may cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING

• Always double check to be sure

that the bonnet is firmly latched

before driving away. If it is not

latched, the bonnet could open

whilst the vehicle is being driven,

causing a total loss of visibility,

which might result in an accident.

• The support rod must be inserted

completely into the hole provided

whenever you inspect the engine

compartment. This will prevent

the bonnet from falling and pos-

sibly injuring you.

• Do not move the vehicle with the

bonnet raised. The view will be

blocked and the bonnet could fall

or get damaged.

Features of your vehicle

264

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened from

inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel

filler lid opener.

✽

NOTICE

If the fuel filler lid does not open

because ice has formed around it, tap

lightly or push on the lid to break the ice

and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid.

If necessary, spray around the lid with

an approved de-icer fluid (do not use

radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle

to a warm place and allow the ice to

melt.

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the fuel

filler lid opener up.

3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).

4. To remove the cap (2), turn the fuel

filler cap counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks” once. This indicates that the

cap is securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-

ly and make sure that it is securely

closed.

FUEL FILLER LID

WARNING - Refuelling

• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin

and thus subject you to the risk

of fire and burns. Always remove

the fuel cap carefully and slowly.

If the cap is venting fuel or if you

hear a hissing sound, wait until

the condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refuelling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

OYN040141R OYN049021

427

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

Use only approved portable plas-

tic fuel containers designed to

carry and store petrol.

• Do not use mobile phones whilst

refuelling. Electric current and/or

electronic interference from

mobile phones can potentially

ignite fuel vapours causing a fire.

• When refuelling, always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by

electrical components related to

the engine can ignite fuel

vapours causing a fire. Once

refuelling is complete, check to

make sure the filler cap and filler

door are securely closed, before

starting the engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit

cigarette in your vehicle whilst at

a gas station especially during

refuelling. Automotive fuel is

highly flammable and can, when

ignited, result in fire.

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuelling

since you can generate static

electricity by touching, rubbing

or sliding against any item or fab-

ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)

capable of producing static elec-

tricity. Static electricity discharge

can ignite fuel vapours resulting

in rapid burning. If you must re-

enter the vehicle, you should

once again eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching a metal part

of the vehicle, away from the fuel

filler neck, nozzle or other petrol

source.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure to

place the container on the

ground prior to refuelling. Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel vapours

causing a fire. Once refuelling

has begun, contact with the vehi-

cle should be maintained until

the filling is complete.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refuelling

dangers

Automotive fuels are flammable

materials. When refuelling, please

note the following guidelines care-

fully. Failure to follow these guide-

lines may result in severe personal

injury, severe burns or death by fire

or explosion.

• Read and follow all warning at the

gas station facility.

• Before refuelling note the loca-

tion of the Emergency Petrol

Shut-Off, if available, at the gas

station facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching another metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

284

(Continued)

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

elling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately contact

the manager of the gas station

and then contact the local fire

department. Follow any safety

instructions they provide.

CAUTION

• Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the “Fuel require-

ments” suggested in section 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can result

in a serious malfunction of the

fuel system or emission control

system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted surfaces

may damage the paint.

• After refuelling, make sure the

fuel cap is installed securely to

prevent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

429

Features of your vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,

you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the

sunroof control lever located on the over-

head console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,

or tilted when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freez-

ing conditions.

• After a vehicle is washed or in a rain-

storm be sure to wipe off any water

that is on the sunroof before operating

it.

✽

NOTICE

The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the

slide position but can slide whilst in a tilt

position.

PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OYN049022

CAUTION

Do not continue to move the sun-

roof control lever after the sunroof

is fully opened, closed, or tilted.

Damage to the motor or system

components could occur.

WARNING

• Never adjust the sunroof or roller

blind whilst driving. This could

result in loss of control and an

accident that may cause death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• If you would like to carry items on

the roof rack using a cross bar,

do not operate the sunroof.

• When carrying cargo on the roof

rack, do not load heavy items

above the sunroof or glass roof.

• All occupants of the vehicle must

wear their seat belts at all times.

Seat belts and child restraints

reduce serious or fatal injuries

for all occupants in the event of a

collision or sudden stop.

Features of your vehicle

304

Sliding the sunroof

Before opening or closing the sunroof,

open the roller blind.

To open or close the sunroof (manual

slide feature), pull or push the sunroof

control lever backward or forward for less

than 0.4 second.

To open the sunroof automatically:

Pull the sunroof control lever backward

for more than 0.4 second and then

release it. The sunroof will automatically

slide open all the way.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,

pull or push the sunroof control lever

momentarily.

To close the sunroof automatically:

Push the sunroof control lever forward for

more than 0.4 second and then release

it. The sunroof will close automatically

but will not close all the way. If you desire

to completely close the sunroof, push the

lever once more until the sunroof is

closed.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,

pull or push the sunroof control lever

momentarily.

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body is detect-

ed whilst the sunroof is closing automat-

ically, it will reverse the direction, and

then stop.

The auto reverse function does not work

if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding

glass and the sunroof sash. You should

always check that all passengers and

objects are away from the sunroof before

closing it.

OJC040023 OYN049026

431

Features of your vehicle

Tilting the sunroof

Before opening or closing the sunroof,

open the roller blind.

To open the sunroof, push the sunroof

control lever upward.

To close the sunroof, push the sunroof

control lever forward until the sunroof

moves to the desired position.

Roller blind

The roller blinds are installed inside of

the sunroof and glass roof.

Open or close it manually when you need

to.

Before opening or closing the sunroof,

open the roller blind.

✽

NOTICE

It is normal for wrinkles to form on the

blind because of its material character-

istic.

WARNING - Sunroof

• Be careful that no head, hands

and body parts are obstructed by

a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend the face, neck,

arms or body outside the sunroof

whilst driving.

• Make sure your hands and head

are safely out of the way before

closing a sunroof.

CAUTION

• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is below

freezing or when the sunroof is

covered with snow or ice, the

glass or the motor could be dam-

aged.

• Do not leave the roller blind

closed whilst the sunroof is

opened.

OYN049027

OJC040025

Features of your vehicle

324

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-

nected or discharged, you must reset

your sunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Open the roller blind.

3. Close the sunroof.

4. Release the sunroof control lever.

5. Push the sunroof control lever forward

in the direction of close (about 10 sec-

onds) until the sunroof moves a little.

Then, release the lever.

6. Push the sunroof control lever forward

in the direction of close until the sun-

roof operates as follows:

TILT OPEN → SLIDE OPEN →

SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-

tem has been reset.

433

Features of your vehicle

Electric power steering (EPS)

Power steering uses the motor to assist

you in steering the vehicle. If the engine

is off or if the power steering system

becomes inoperative, the vehicle may

still be steered, but it will require

increased steering effort.

The motor driven power steering is con-

trolled by the power steering control unit

which senses the steering wheel torque

and vehicle speed to command the

motor.

The steering effort becomes heavier as

the vehicle’s speed increases and

becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed

decreases for better control of the steer-

ing wheel.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, have the power steer-

ing checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

✽

NOTICE

The following symptoms may occur dur-

ing normal vehicle operation:

• The EPS warning light does not illu-

minate.

(Continued)

• The steering effort is high immediate-

ly after turning the ignition switch on.

This happens as the EPS system per-

forms the diagnostics. When the diag-

nostics is completed, the steering

effort will return to its normal condi-

tion.

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the ignition switch is

turned to the ON or LOCK position.

• Motor noise may be heard when the

vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving

speed.

• If the Electric Power Steering System

does not operate normally, the warn-

ing light will illuminate on the instru-

ment cluster. The steering wheel may

become difficult to control or operate

abnormally. Take your vehicle to a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer and

have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible.

• The steering effort increases if the

steering wheel is rotated continuously

when the vehicle is not in motion.

However, after a few minutes, it will

return to its normal conditions.

• When you operate the steering wheel

in low temperature, abnormal noise

could occur. If temperature rises, the

noise will disappear. This is a normal

condition.

Tilt steering

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the

steering wheel before you drive. You can

also raise it to give your legs more room

when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positioned

so that it is comfortable for you to drive,

whilst permitting you to see the instru-

ment panel warning lights and gauges.

STEERING WHEEL

WARNING

• Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel whilst driving. You

may lose steering control and

cause severe personal injury,

death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steering

wheel both up and down to be

certain it is locked in position.

Features of your vehicle

344

To change the steering wheel angle,

push down the lock release lever (1),

adjust the steering wheel to the desired

angle (2) and height (3), then pull up the

lock-release lever to lock the steering

wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the

steering wheel to the desired position

before driving.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn sym-

bol on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it

operates properly.

✽

NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area indi-

cated by the horn symbol on your steer-

ing wheel (see illustration). The horn

will operate only when this area is

pressed.

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do

not press on the horn with a sharp-

pointed object.

OJC040029

OJC040028R

435

Features of your vehicle

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that the

centre view through the rear window is

seen. Make this adjustment before you

start driving.

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you start

driving and whilst the day/night lever is in

the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview

clarity in the night position.

Electrochromic mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatical-

ly controls the glare from the headlights

of the car behind you in nighttime or low

light driving conditions. The sensor

mounted in the mirror senses the light

level around the vehicle, and automati-

cally controls the headlight glare from

vehicles behind you.

When the engine is running, the glare is

automatically controlled by the sensor

mounted in the rearview mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted into

reverse, the mirror will automatically go

to the brightest setting in order to

improve the drivers view behind the vehi-

cle.

MIRRORS

OAM049023

CAUTION

When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as that may cause the liq-

uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-

ing.

Day

Night

WARNING - Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear

seat or cargo area which would

interfere with your vision out of the

rear window.

WARNING

Do not adjust the rearview mirror

whilst the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control, and

an accident which could cause

death, serious injury or property

damage.

Features of your vehicle

364

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• The mirror defaults to the ON position

whenever the ignition switch is turned

on.

• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn

the automatic dimming function off.

The mirror indicator light will turn off.

Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn

the automatic dimming function on.

The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust the mirror angles

before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-

hand and right-hand outside rearview

mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch (if

equipped). The mirror heads can be fold-

ed back to prevent damage during an

automatic car wash or when passing

through a narrow street.

WARNING - Rearview mir-

rors

• The right outside rearview mirror

is convex. In some countries, the

left outside rearview mirror is

also convex. Objects seen in the

mirror are closer than they

appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror

or direct observation to deter-

mine the actual distance of fol-

lowing vehicles when changing

lanes.

OYN049030

OYN049031

■ Type A

■ Type B

Indicator Sensor

Indicator

Sensor

Rearview display

437

Features of your vehicle

Remote control

Manual type (if equipped)

To adjust an outside mirror, move the

control lever.

CAUTION

Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the surface

of the glass. If ice should restrict

movement of the mirror, do not

force the mirror for adjustment. To

remove ice, use a deicer spray.

CAUTION

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do

not adjust the mirror by force. Use

an approved spray de-icer (not radi-

ator antifreeze) to release the

frozen mechanism or move the

vehicle to a warm place and allow

the ice to melt.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors whilst the vehicle

is moving. This could result in loss

of control, and an accident which

could cause death, serious injury

or property damage.

B510A01E/H

Features of your vehicle

384

Electric type (if equipped)

The electric remote control mirror switch

allows you to adjust the position of the

left and right outside rearview mirrors. To

adjust the position of either mirror, move

the lever (1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to

select the right side mirror or the left side

mirror, then press a corresponding point

on the mirror adjustment control to posi-

tion the selected mirror up, down, left or

right.

After adjustment, put the lever into neu-

tral (centre) position to prevent inadver-

tent adjustment.

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Manual type

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp

the housing of the mirror and then fold it

toward the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate whilst the switch is

pressed. Do not press the switch

longer than necessary, the motor

may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-

side rearview mirror by hand.

Doing so may damage the parts.

OJC040032R

1LDA2083A/H

439

Features of your vehicle

Electric Type (if equipped)

To fold the outside rearview mirror, press

the button.

To unfold it, press the button again.

Outside rearview mirror heater

(if equipped)

The outside rearview mirror heater is

actuated in connection with the rear win-

dow defroster. To heat the outside

rearview mirror glass, push the button

( ) for rear window defroster.

The outside rearview mirror glass will be

heated for defrosting or defogging and

will give you improved rear vision in

inclement weather conditions. Push the

button again to turn the heater off. The

outside rearview mirror heater automati-

cally turns off after 20 minutes.

CAUTION

In case it is an electric type outside

rearview mirror, don’t fold it by

hand. It could cause motor failure.

CAUTION

The electric type outside rearview

mirror operates even though the

ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-

tion. However, to prevent unneces-

sary battery discharge, do not

adjust the mirrors longer than nec-

essary whilst the engine is not run-

ning.

OJC040033R

Features of your vehicle

404

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

OJC040040R/OJC040041R

* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■ Type A

■ Type B

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Warning and indicator lights

5. Engine temperature gauge

6. Fuel gauge

7. Odometer/Tripmeter*

* if equipped

441

Features of your vehicle

Instrument panel illumination

(if equipped)

Rotate the illumination control switch to

adjust the instrument panel illumination

intensity. For instrument cluster type A,

the vehicle’s parking lights or headlights

should be on to adjust the instrument

panel illumination.

Gauges

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the forward

speed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-

ters per hour and/or miles per hour.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approxi-

mate number of engine revolutions per

minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct

shift points and to prevent lugging and/or

over-revving the engine.

OJC040048

OJC040049

■

Kilometer per hour

- Type A

■

Mile per hour

- Type A

OJC040046

OJC040047

■

etr

ol -

Type A

- Type B

■

Diesel

- Type A

- Type B

OYN049044R

Features of your vehicle

424

The tachometer pointer may move slight-

ly when the ignition switch is in ON posi-

tion with the engine OFF. This movement

is normal and will not affect the accuracy

of the tachometer once the engine is run-

ning.

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the

engine coolant when the ignition switch

is ON. The gauge is supplemented by a

Engine coolant temperature warning

light, which illuminates when the engine

is overheating.

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.

CAUTION

If the gauge shows beyond the nor-

mal range area toward the “130”

position, it indicates overheating

that may damage the engine.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. The engine

coolant is under pressure and

could cause severe burns. Wait

until the engine is cool before

adding coolant to the reservoir.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine dam-

age.

OJC040050

■ Type A

■ Type B

443

Features of your vehicle

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank.

The fuel tank capacity is given in

section 8.

The fuel gauge is supplement-

ed by a low fuel warning light, which will

illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly

empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light

may come on earlier than usual due to

the movement of fuel in the tank.

: The arrow indicates the fuel filler lid

is in the left side of the vehicle.

Odometer (km or mi.)

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to

determine when periodic maintenance

should be performed.

✽

NOTICE

It is forbidden to alter the odometer of

all vehicles with the intent to change the

mileage registered on the odometer. The

alteration may void your warranty cov-

erage.

WARNING - Fuel gauge

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addition-

al fuel as soon as possible after the

warning light comes on or when the

gauge indicator comes close to the

“0” level.

CAUTION

Avoid driving with a very low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the catalytic converter.

OJC040051

■ Type A

■ Type B

OJC040100

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

444

Tripmeter/Trip computer (if equipped)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-

controlled driver information system that

displays information related to driving,

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position. All stored driving information

(except TRIP A/B) resets if the battery is

disconnected.

Press the TRIP button for less than 1

second to select any mode as follows:

Tripmeter (km or mi.)

TRIP A : Tripmeter A

TRIP B : Tripmeter B

This mode indicates the distance of indi-

vidual trips selected since the last trip-

meter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to

999.9 km (0.0 to 999.9 miles).

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the tripmeter

(RESET A or TRIP B) is being displayed,

clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

OJC040045

Tripmeter B

Instant fuel consumption*

Tripmeter A

Distance to empty*

Average fuel consumption*

Average refuel consumption*

* if equipped

Elapsed time*

Average speed*

OJC040101

■ Type A

■ Type B

445

Features of your vehicle

Distance to empty (if equipped)

(km or mi.)

This mode indicates the estimated dis-

tance to empty based on the current fuel

in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel

delivered to the engine. When the

remaining distance is below 50 km (30

miles), “---” will be displayed.

The meter’s working range is from 50 to

999 km (30 to 999 miles).

Average fuel consumption (if equipped)

(l/100 km or MPG)

This mode calculates the average fuel

consumption from the total fuel used and

the distance since the last average con-

sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-

culated from the fuel consumption input.

For an accurate calculation, drive more

than 50 m (0.03 miles).

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the average fuel

consumption is being displayed, clears

the average fuel consumption to zero (--

.-).

Average refuel consumption

(l/100 km or MPG)

This mode calculates the average fuel

consumption from the total fuel used and

the distance since the last average con-

sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-

culated from the fuel consumption input.

For an accurate calculation, drive more

than 50 m (0.03 miles).

The average refuel consumption resets

to zero (--.-) when the vehicle is refueled.

OJC040102

■ Type A

■ Type B

OJC040103

■ Type A

■ Type B

OJC040107

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

464

Instant fuel consumption (if equipped)

(l/100 km or MPG)

This mode calculates the instant fuel

consumption of the last few seconds.

✽

NOTICE

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-

ed, the “Distance to empty” function

may not operate correctly.

The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 6 litres (1.6

gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-

cle.

• The fuel consumption and distance to

empty may vary significantly based

on driving conditions, driving habits,

and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-

mate of the available driving distance.

This may differ from the actual driv-

ing distance available.

Average speed (km/h or MPH)

This mode calculates the average speed

of the vehicle since the last average

speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

average speed keeps going whilst the

engine is running.

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the average speed

is being displayed, clears the average

speed to zero (---).

OJC040105

■ Type A

■ Type B

OJC040104

■ Type A

■ Type B

447

Features of your vehicle

Elapsed time (if equipped)

This mode indicates the total time trav-

eled since the last driving time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

driving time keeps going whilst the

engine is running.

The meter’s working range is from

00:00~99:59.

Pressing the RESET button for more

than 1 second, when the driving time is

being displayed, clears the driving time to

zero (00:00).

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). Any light that does not illuminate

should be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

After starting the engine, check to make

sure that all warning lights are off. If any

are still on, this indicates a situation that

needs attention.

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

This light also comes on when the

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is

not working properly. If the AIR BAG

warning light does not come on, or con-

tinuously remains on after operating for

about 6 seconds when you turned the

ignition switch to the ON position or start-

ed the engine, or if it comes on whilst

driving, have the SRS inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For information about the passenger’s

front air bag ON/OFF indicator, refer to

"Air bag - supplemental restraint system"

in section 3.

OJC040106

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

484

Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver and passen-

ger, the seat belt warning light will illumi-

nate for approximately 6 seconds each

time you turn the ignition switch ON

regardless of belt fastening.

For details, refer to the “Seat belt” in sec-

tion 3.

Engine oil pressure

warning

This warning light indicates the engine oil

pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates whilst driv-

ing:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.

2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on after

adding oil or if oil is not available, call a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

If the engine is not stopped imme-

diately after the engine oil pressure

warning light is illuminated, severe

damage could result.

CAUTION

If the oil pressure warning light

stays on whilst the engine is run-

ning, serious engine damage may

result. The oil pressure warning

light comes on whenever there is

insufficient oil pressure. In normal

operation, it should come on when

the ignition switch is turned on,

then go out when the engine is

started. If the oil pressure warning

light stays on whilst the engine is

running, there is a serious malfunc-

tion.

If this happens, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so, turn off

the engine and check the oil level. If

the oil level is low, fill the engine oil

to the proper level and start the

engine again. If the light stays on

with the engine running, turn the

engine off immediately. In any

instance where the oil light stays on

when the engine is running, the

engine should be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer

before the car is driven again.

449

Features of your vehicle

Engine oil level warning

light

The engine oil level warning light illumi-

nates when the engine oil level should be

checked.

If the warning light comes on, check the

engine oil level as soon as possible and

add engine oil as required.

Slowly pour the recommended oil little by

little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity :

approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 l)

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer

to "Recommended lubricants and capac-

ities" in section 8.)

Do not overfill the engine oil. Make sure

the oil level is not above F (Full) mark on

the dipstick.

✽

NOTICE

• If you drive approximately 30 miles

(50 km) after adding engine oil, the

warning light will go off.

• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3

times within 10 seconds, the warning

light will go off immediately. However,

when you turn off the warning light

without adding engine oil, the light

will come on again after driving

approximately 30 miles (50 km).

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instru-

ment panel show the direction indicated

by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on

but does not blink, blinks more rapidly

than normal, or does not illuminate at all,

it indicates a malfunction in the turn sig-

nal system. You should consult your

repairer.

This indicator also blinks when the haz-

ard warning switch is turned on.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

lights are on and in the high beam posi-

tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Low Beam Indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

lights are on and in the low beam posi-

tion.

Features of your vehicle

504

Front fog light indicator

(if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the front

fog lights are ON.

Rear fog light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the rear

fog lights are ON.

Light on indicator

The indicator illuminates when the tail

lights or headlights are ON.

Automatic transaxle shift

position indicator

(if equipped)

The indicator displays which automatic

transaxle shift lever is selected.

Manual transaxle shift

indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you which gear is

desired whilst driving to save fuel.

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd

gear is desired (currently the shift

lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the

3rd gear is desired (currently the

shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).

When the system is not working proper-

ly, the indicator (Up & Down Arrow and

gear) is not displayed.

Engine coolant tempera-

ture warning light

The warning light shows the temperature

of the engine coolant when the ignition

switch is ON.

The warning light illuminates if the tem-

perature of the engine coolant is above

120±3°C (248±5.5°F).

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “Overheating” in the section 6.

✽

NOTICE

If the engine coolant temperature warn-

ing light illuminates, it indicates over-

heating that may damage the engine.

451

Features of your vehicle

Charging system warning

light

This warning light indicates a malfunction

of either the generator or electrical

charging system.

If the warning light illuminates whilst the

vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-

age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-

lem exists somewhere in the electrical

charging system. Have a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer correct the prob-

lem as soon as possible.

EPS (Electric power steer-

ing) system warning light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates after the

ignition key is turned to the ON position

and then it will go off when the engine

starts.

This light also comes on when the EPS

has malfunctioned. If it comes on whilst

driving, have your vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Door ajar warning light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates when a

door is not closed securely.

Tailgate open warning light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates when the

tailgate is not closed securely.

Door and tailgate open

indicator (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when a door

or/and tailgate is not closed securely.

EPS

Features of your vehicle

524

Immobiliser indicator

(if equipped)

Without smart key system

This indicator illuminates when the

immobiliser key is inserted and turned to

the ON position to start the engine.

At this time, you can start the engine.The

indicator goes out after approximately 30

seconds.

If this indicator blinks when the ignition

switch is in the ON position before start-

ing the engine, have the system checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

With smart key system

If any of the following occurs in a vehicle

equipped with the smart key, the immo-

biliser indicator illuminates, blinks or

goes off.

• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if

the ENGINE START/STOP button is in

the ACC or ON position, the indicator

will illuminate for approximately 30

seconds to indicate that you are able to

start the engine. However, when the

smart key is not in the vehicle, if the

ENGINE START/STOP button is

pressed, the indicator will blink for a

few seconds to indicate that you are

not able to start the engine.

• If the indicator illuminates only for 2

seconds and goes out when the

ENGINE START/STOP button is

turned to ON position with the smart

key in the vehicle, have the system

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

• When the battery is weak, if the

ENGINE START/STOP button is

pressed, the indicator blinks, you are

not able to start the engine. However,

you are able to start the engine by

pressing the ENGINE START/STOP

button directly with the smart key. Also,

if the smart key system related parts

have a problem, the indicator will blink.

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fuel tank

is nearly empty. When it comes on, you

should add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the fuel level warning light on

or with the fuel level below “0” can cause

the engine to misfire and damage the

catalytic converter (if equipped).

453

Features of your vehicle

Malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) (check engine light)

(if equipped)

This indicator is part of the Engine

Control System which monitors various

emission control system components. If

this indicator illuminates whilst driving, it

indicates that a potential malfunction has

been detected somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

This indicator will also illuminate when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, and will go off in a few seconds

after the engine is started. If it illuminates

whilst driving, or does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, take your vehicle to the

nearest a HYUNDAI authorised repairer

and have the system checked.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be

drivable, but have the system checked by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer prompt-

ly.

CAUTION

• Prolonged driving with the

Emission Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-

nated may cause damage to the

emission control systems which

could effect drivability and/or fuel

economy.

•

If the

Emission

Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-

nates, potential catalytic converter

damage is possible which could

result in loss of engine power.

Have the Engine Control System

inspected as soon as possible by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION - Diesel engine

When the malfunction indicator

light blinks, it may stop blinking

after driving the vehicle at more

than 37 mph (60km/h) or at more

than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000

engine rpm for a certain time (for

about 25 minutes).

If the malfunction indicator light

continues to blink in spite of the

procedure, please visit a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer and then check

the DPF system.

If you continue to drive with the

malfunction indicator light blinking

for a long time, the DPF system can

be damaged and fuel consumption

can worsen.

Features of your vehicle

544

Parking brake & brake fluid

warning

Parking brake warning

This warning light is illuminated when the

parking brake is applied with the ignition

switch in the START or ON position. The

warning light should go off when the

parking brake is released.

The parking brake warning chime (if

equipped) will sound to remind you that

the parking brake is applied when you

are driving above approximately 10 km/h

(6 mph). Always release the parking

brake before you drive.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may

indicate that the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required. Then check all brake

components for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are

found, the warning light remains on or

the brakes do not operate properly.

Have the vehicle towed to any

HYUNDAI authorised repairer for a

brake system inspection and neces-

sary repairs.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-

nal braking systems. This means you still

have braking on two wheels even if one

of the dual systems should fail. With only

one of the dual systems working, more

than normal pedal travel and greater

pedal pressure are required to stop the

vehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop in

as short a distance with only a portion of

the brake system working. If the brakes

fail whilst you are driving, shift to a lower

gear for additional engine braking and

stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do

so. To check bulb operation, check

whether the parking brake and brake

fluid warning light illuminates when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

ABS (Anti-lock brake sys-

tem) warning light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates if the igni-

tion switch is turned ON and goes off in

approximately 3 seconds if the system is

operating normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on,

comes on whilst driving, or does not

come on when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, this indicates

that the ABS may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible. The normal braking

system will still be operational, but with-

out the assistance of the anti-lock brake

system.

WARNING

Driving the vehicle with a warning

light on is dangerous. If the brake

warning light remains on, have the

brakes checked and repaired imme-

diately by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

455

Features of your vehicle

Electronic brake force distri-

bution (EBD) system warning

light

If two warning lights illumi-

nate at the same time whilst

driving, your vehicle may

have a malfunction with ABS

and EBD system.

In this case, your ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally. Have the

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer as soon as possible.

ESP (Electronic Stability

Program) indicator

(if equipped)

The ESP indicator will illuminate when

the ignition switch is turned ON, but

should go off after approximately 3 sec-

onds. When the ESP is on, it monitors the

driving conditions. Under normal driving

conditions, the ESP indicator will remain

off. When a slippery or low traction con-

dition is encountered, the ESP will oper-

ate, and the ESP indicator will blink to

indicate the ESP is operating.

But, if the ESP system malfunctions the

indicator illuminates and stays on. Take

your vehicle to a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer and have the system checked.

ESP OFF indicator

(if equipped)

The ESP OFF indicator will illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned ON,

but should go off after approximately 3

seconds. To switch to ESP OFF mode,

press the ESP OFF button. The ESP

OFF indicator will illuminate indicating

the ESP is deactivated.

✽

NOTICE

After reconnecting or recharging a dis-

charged battery, the ESP OFF indicator

may illuminate. In this case, turn the

steering wheel 360 degrees to the left

and 360 degrees to the right whilst the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

Then, restart the engine after the igni-

tion is off. If the ESP OFF indicator does

not turn off, have the system checked by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

WARNING

If both ABS and Brake warning

lights are on and stay on, your vehi-

cle’s brake system will not work

normally. So you may experience

an unexpected and dangerous situ-

ation during sudden braking. In this

case, avoid high speed driving and

abrupt braking. Have your vehicle

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer as soon as possible.

Features of your vehicle

564

Cruise indicator (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator illuminates when the cruise

control system is enabled.

The cruise indicator in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the cruise

control ON-OFF button on the steering

wheel is pushed.

The indicator goes off when the cruise

control ON-OFF button is pushed again.

For more information about the use of

cruise control, refer to “Cruise control

system” in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator illuminates when the cruise

control switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.

The cruise SET indicator in the instru-

ment cluster illuminats when the cruise

control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed.

The cruise SET indicator does not illumi-

nate when the cruise control switch

(CANCEL) is pushed or the system is

disengaged.

TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System) indicator (if equipped)

Low tyre pressure telltale /

TPMS malfunction indicator

The low tyre pressure telltale/TPMS mal-

function indicator comes on for 3 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is turned to

the "ON" position.

The TPMS malfunction indicator will illu-

minate after it blinks for approximately 1

minute when there is a problem with the

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System.

If this occurs, have the system checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

For details, refer to the “TPMS” in section

SET

WARNING

Significantly low tyre pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and can

contribute to loss of vehicle control

and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure

tyres will cause the tyres to over-

heat and fail.

WARNING - Safe stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tyre damage

caused by external factors.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,

immediately take your foot off the

accelerator, apply the brakes

gradually and with light force,

and slowly move to a safe posi-

tion off the road.

457

Features of your vehicle

AUTO STOP indicator

(if equipped)

This indicator will illuminate when the

engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the

ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.

When the automatic starting occurs, the

"AUTO STOP" indicator on the cluster

will blink for 5 seconds.

For more details, refer to the “ISG (Idle

Stop and Go) system” in section 5.

✽

NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by

the ISG system, some warning

lights(ABS, ESP, ESP OFF, EPS or

Parking brake warning light) may turn

on for a few seconds.

This happens because of low battery

voltage. It does not mean the system has

malfunctioned.

Sunroof open warning chime

(if equipped)

If the driver removes the ignition key

(smart key: turns off the engine) and

opens the driver-side door when the sun-

roof is not fully closed, the warning chime

will sound for approximately 7 seconds.

Close the sunroof securely when leaving

your vehicle.

Glow indicator

(Diesel engine)

The indicator illuminates when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position. The

engine can be started after the preheat

indicator light goes off. The illuminating

time varies with the water temperature,

air temperature and battery condition.

✽

NOTICE

If the engine does not start within 10

seconds after the preheating is complet-

ed, turn the ignition key once more to

the LOCK position for 10 seconds, and

then to the ON position, in order to pre-

heat again.

CAUTION

If the preheat indicator continues to

illuminate or blink on and off after

the engine has warmed up or whilst

driving, have the system checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer

as soon as possible.

Features of your vehicle

584

Fuel filter warning light

(Diesel engine)

This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is set to the

ON position and then it will go off. If it

lights up whilst the engine is running, it

indicates that water has accumulated

inside the fuel filter. If this happens,

remove the water from the fuel filter. For

more information, refer to “Fuel filter” in

section 7.

LCD display warning (if equipped)

Door open ! (if equipped)

It displays the cor-

responding door or

tailgate that is not

closed securely.

Rear parking assist warning (if equipped)

It displays the area

an obstacle is

detected whilst

moving rearward.

For details, refer to

“Rear parking

assist system” in

section 4.

Low Tire Pressure (if equipped)

It displays the cor-

responding tyre

that is low with

pressure. For

details, refer to

“TPMS” in section

❈ The actual indicator in LCD display may dif-

fer from the illustration.

CAUTION

When the fuel filter warning light

illuminates, engine power (vehicle

speed & idle speed) may decrease.

If you keep driving with the warning

light on, you can damage your vehi-

cle's engine parts and injection sys-

tem of the Common Rail.

If this occurs, have your vehicle

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer as soon as possible.

459

Features of your vehicle

Speed limit (if equipped)

The speed limit

illuminates on the

LCD display when

the speed limit

control system is

enabled.

The speed limit

illuminates on the LCD display when the

speed limit ON-OFF button on the steer-

ing wheel is pressed.

If the " " indicator is shown, it indi-

cates the speed limit has not been set.

The set speed limit

will display when

the speed limit

control switch

(SET-/RES+) is

ON.

If you drive over

the speed limit, the set speed limit will

blink and chime will sound.

The set speed limit turns off when the

speed limit is cancelled by pressing the

CANCEL button.

The speed limit display goes off when the

speed limit is deactivated.

Also, if there is a problem with the speed

limit control system, the “ ” indicator

will blink.

If this occurs, have the system checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

For more information about the speed

limit control usage, refer to “Speed limit

control system” in section 5.

Key is not in vehicle

If the smart key is

not in the vehicle

and if any door is

opened or closed

with the ENGINE

START/STOP but-

ton in the ACC,

ON, or START position, the warning illu-

minates on the LCD display. Also, the

chime sounds for 5 seconds when the

smart key is not in the vehicle and the

door is closed.

Always have the smart key with you.

Features of your vehicle

604

Key is not detected

If the smart key is

not in the vehicle

or is not detected

and you press the

ENGINE START/

STOP button, the

warning illumi-

nates on the LCD display for 10 seconds.

Also, the immobiliser indicator blinks for

10 seconds.

Low key battery

If the ENGINE

START/STOP but-

ton turns to the

OFF position when

the smart key in

the vehicle dis-

charges, the warn-

ing illuminates on the LCD display for

about 10 seconds. Also, the warning

chime sounds once.

Replace the battery with a new one.

Press brake pedal to start engine

(Automatic transaxle)

If the ENGINE

START/STOP but-

ton turns to the

ACC position twice

by pressing the

button repeatedly

without depressing

the brake pedal, the warning illuminates

on the LCD display for about 10 seconds

to indicate that you should depress the

brake pedal to start the engine.

Press clutch pedal to start engine

(Manual transaxle)

If the ENGINE

START/STOP but-

ton turns to the

ACC position twice

by pressing the

button repeatedly

without depressing

the clutch pedal, the warning illuminates

on the LCD display for about 10 seconds

to indicate that you should depress the

clutch pedal to start the engine.

Shift to "P" position

(Automatic transaxle)

If you try to turn off

the engine without

the shift lever in

the P (Park) posi-

tion, the ENGINE

START/STOP but-

ton will turn to the

ACC position. If the button is pressed

once more it will turn to the ON position.

The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-

play for about 10 seconds to indicate that

you should press the ENGINE START/

STOP button with the shift lever in the P

(Park) position to turn off the engine.

Also, the warning chime sounds for about

10 seconds. (if equipped)

461

Features of your vehicle

Press start button again

If you can not

operate the

ENGINE START/

STOP button when

there is a problem

with the ENGINE

START/STOP but-

ton system, the warning illuminates for

10 seconds and the chime sounds con-

tinuously to indicate that you could start

the engine by pressing the ENGINE

START/STOP button once more.

The chime will stop if the ENGINE

START/STOP button system works nor-

mally or the theft alarm system is armed.

If the warning illuminates each time you

press the ENGINE START/STOP button,

take your vehicle to a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer and have the system

checked.

Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine

(Automatic transaxle)

If you try to start

the engine with the

shift lever not in

the P(Park) or

N(Neutral) posi-

tion, the warning

illuminates for

about 10 seconds on the LCD display.

You can also start the engine with the

shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but

for your safety start the engine with the

shift lever in the P(Park) position.

Press start button whilst turn steering

If the steering

wheel does not

unlock normally

when the ENGINE

START/STOP but-

ton is pressed, the

warning illumi-

nates for 10 seconds on the LCD display.

Also, the warning chime sounds once

and the ENGINE START/STOP button

light blinks for 10 seconds.

When you are warned, press the

ENGINE START/STOP button whilst

turning the steering wheel right and left.

Features of your vehicle

624

Check steering wheel lock

If the steering

wheel does not

lock normally

when the ENGINE

START/STOP but-

ton turns to the

OFF position, the

warning illuminates for 10 seconds on

the LCD display. Also, the warning chime

sounds for 3 seconds and the ENGINE

START/STOP button light blinks for 10

seconds.

Press start button with smart key

If you press the

ENGINE START/

STOP button

whilst the warning

“Key is not detect-

ed” illuminates the

warning “Please

press the start button with smart key” illu-

minates for 10 seconds on the LCD dis-

play. Also, the immobiliser indicator blinks

for 10 seconds.

Check stop lamp fuse

When the stop

lamp fuse is dis-

connected, the

warning illumi-

nates for 10 sec-

onds on the LCD

display.

Replace the fuse with a new one. If that

is not possible you can start the engine

by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP

button for 10 seconds in ACC.

463

Features of your vehicle

The rear parking assist system assists

the driver during backward movement of

the vehicle by chiming if any object is

sensed within a distance of 47 in. (120

cm) behind the vehicle. This system is a

supplemental system and it is not intend-

ed to nor does it replace the need for

extreme care and attention of the driver.

The sensing range and objects

detectable by the back sensors are limit-

ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much

attention to what is behind you as you

would in a vehicle without a rear parking

assist system.

Operation of the rear parking

assist system

Operating condition

• This system will activate when the indi-

cator on the rear parking assist OFF

button is not illuminated.

If you desire to deactivate the rear

parking assist system, press the rear

parking assist OFF button again. (The

indicator on the button will illuminate.)

To turn the system on, press the button

again. (The indicator on the button will

go off.)

• This system will activate when backing

up with the ignition switch ON.

If the vehicle is moving at a speed over

3 mph (5 km/h), the system may not be

activated correctly.

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

The rear parking assist system is a

supplementary function only. The

operation of the rear parking assist

system can be affected by several

factors (including environmental

conditions). It is the responsibility

of the driver to always check the

area behind the vehicle before and

whilst backing up.

OJC040052

Sensors

OYN049128R

Features of your vehicle

644

• The sensing distance whilst the rear

parking assist system is in operation is

approximately 47 in. (120 cm).

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the closest

one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound

• When an object is 47 in. to 32 in. (120

cm to 81 cm) from the rear bumper:

Buzzer beeps intermittently

• When an object is 31 in. to 16 in. (80

cm to 41 cm) from the rear bumper:

Buzzer beeps more frequently

• When an object is within 15 in. (40 cm)

of the rear bumper:

Buzzer sounds continuously.

Type of the warning indicator

(if equipped)

*1: It indicates the range of sensed object

by each sensor. (Left, Centre, Right)

❈ In case the object is between or close

to the sensors, the indicator could be

different.

Distance from

object

Warning indicator

32 in. ~ 47 in.

(81cm ~ 120 cm)

16 in. ~ 31 in.

(41cm ~80 cm)

Less than 15 in.

(40 cm)

465

Features of your vehicle

Non-operational conditions of

rear parking assist system

The rear parking assist system may

not operate properly when:

1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will

operate normally when the moisture

has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreign

matter, such as snow or water, or the

sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate

normally when the material is removed

or the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces

(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-

ent).

4. Objects generating excessive noise

(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle

engines, or truck air brakes) are within

range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.

6. Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are within range of the sensor.

7. Trailer towing.

The detecting range may decrease

when:

1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-

ter such as snow or water. (The sens-

ing range will return to normal when

removed.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremely

hot or cold.

The following objects may not be rec-

ognized by the sensor:

1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,

chains or small poles.

2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-

sor frequency such as clothes, spongy

material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m

(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)

in diameter.

Rear parking assist system pre-

cautions

• The rear parking assist system may

not sound sequentially depending on

the speed and shapes of the objects

detected.

• The rear parking assist system may

malfunction if the vehicle bumper

height or sensor installation has been

modified or damaged. Any non-factory

installed equipment or accessories

may also interfere with the sensor per-

formance.

• The sensor may not recognize objects

less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sen-

sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-

tance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or stained

with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor

may be inoperative until the stains are

removed using a soft cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-

sor. Sensor damage could occur.

Features of your vehicle

664

✽

NOTICE

This system can only sense objects with-

in the range and location of the sensors;

it can not detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed. Also,

small or slim objects, such as poles or

objects located between sensors may not

be detected by the sensors.

Always visually check behind the vehi-

cle when backing up.

Be sure to inform any drivers of the

vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the

system regarding the systems capabili-

ties and limitations.

Self-diagnosis

When you shift the gear to the R

(Reverse) position and if one or more of

the below occurs you may have a mal-

function in the rear parking assist sys-

tem.

• You don't hear an audible warning

sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-

tently.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

WARNING

Pay close attention when the vehi-

cle is driven close to objects on the

road, particularly pedestrians, and

especially children. Be aware that

some objects may not be detected

by the sensors, due to the object’s

distance, size or material, all of

which can limit the effectiveness of

the sensor. Always perform a visu-

al inspection to make sure the vehi-

cle is clear of all obstructions

before moving the vehicle in any

direction.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not

cover any accidents or damage to

the vehicle or injuries to its occu-

pants due to a rear parking assist

system malfunction. Always drive

safely and cautiously.

(blinks)

• is displayed. (if equipped)

467

Features of your vehicle

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

The rearview camera will activate when

the back-up light is ON with the ignition

switch ON and the shift lever in the R

(Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental system

that shows behind the vehicle through

the rearview display mirror whilst back-

ing-up.

The rearview camera may be turned off

by pressing the ON/OFF button (1) when

the rearview camera is activated.

To turn the camera on again, press the

ON/OFF button (1) again when the igni-

tion switch is on and the shift lever in R

(Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on

automatically whenever the ignition

switch is turned off and on again.

Detailed information for the rearview

camera (Type B) is described in a sepa-

rately supplied manual.

WARNING

• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsi-

bility of the driver to always

check the inside/outside rearview

mirror and the area behind the

vehicle before and whilst backing

up because there is a dead zone

that can't be seen through the

camera.

• Always keep the camera lens

clean. If lens is covered with for-

eign matter, the camera may not

operate normally.

OJC040053

OJC040054R

■ Type B

OYN049135R

■ Type A

Rear view display

Features of your vehicle

684

The hazard warning flasher should be

used whenever you find it necessary to

stop the vehicle in a hazardous location.

When you must make such an emer-

gency stop, always pull off the road as far

as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on

by pushing in the hazard switch. Both

turn signal lights will blink. The hazard

warning lights will operate even though

the key is not in the ignition switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off,

push the switch again.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

OJC060001

469

Features of your vehicle

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the parking lights when the

driver removes the ignition key and

opens the driver-side door.

• With this feature, the parking lights will

turn off automatically if the driver parks

on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on

when the ignition key is removed, per-

form the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on the

steering column.

Headlight escort function

(if equipped)

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC

or OFF position with the headlights ON,

the headlights (and/or tail lights) remain

on for about 20 minutes. However, with

the engine off if the driver’s door is

opened and closed, the headlights

(and/or tail lights) are turned off after 30

seconds.

The headlights (and/or tail lights) can be

turned off by pressing the lock button on

the transmitter (or smart key) twice or

turning the light switch to the OFF or

Auto position.

However, if you turn the light switch to the

Auto position when it is dark outside, the

headlights will not be turned off.

Smart conering light

(if equipped)

Whilst driving the corner, for your sight

and safety, the smart cornering light is

turns on automatically. The system will

operate automatically as follows:

• When turning the headlight on

• When the steering wheel angle is over

25~35 (it differs according to vehicle

speed)

• When the vehicle speed is over 1.8

mph (3 km/h)

• When driving forward

LIGHTING

CAUTION

If the driver gets out of the vehicle

through other doors (except driver's

door), the battery saver function

does not operate and the headlight

escort function does not turn off

automatically. Therefore, It causes

the battery to be discharged. In this

case, make sure to turn off the lamp

before getting out of the vehicle.

Features of your vehicle

704

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a

Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the

end of the control lever to one of the fol-

lowing positions:

(1) Off position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parking

light position (1st position), the tail posi-

tion, license and instrument panel lights

will turn ON.

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlight

position (2nd position), the head, tail,

position, license and instrument panel

lights are ON.

✽

NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlights.

OED040800OED040046OED040045

471

Features of your vehicle

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO light

position, the taillights and headlights will

be turned ON or OFF automatically

depending on the amount of light outside

the vehicle.

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights, push

the lever away from you. Pull it back for

low beams.

The high beam indicator will light when

the headlight high beams are switched on.

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on for a

prolonged time whilst the engine is not

running.

OED040801

CAUTION

• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrument

panel, this will ensure better auto-

light system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using a

window cleaner, the cleanser may

leave a light film which could

interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or

other types of metallic coating on

the front windscreen, the Auto

light system may not work prop-

erly.

OYN049201

Features of your vehicle

724

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

towards you. It will return to the normal

(low beam) position when released. The

headlight switch does not need to be on

to use this flashing feature.

Turn signals and lane change sig-

nals

The ignition switch must be on for the

turn signals to function. To turn on the

turn signals, move the lever up or down

(A). The green arrow indicators on the

instrument panel indicate which turn sig-

nal is operating. They will self-cancel

after a turn is completed. If the indicator

continues to flash after a turn, manually

return the lever to the off position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn

signal lever slightly and hold it in position

(B). The lever will return to the off position

when released.

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the

turn signal bulbs may be burned out and

will require replacement.

One-touch lane change function

(if equipped)

To activate an one-touch lane change

function, move the turn signal lever

slightly and then release it. The lane

change signals will blink 3 times.

✽

NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick

or slow, a bulb may be burned out or

have a poor electrical connection in the

circuit.

OED040804OED040802

473

Features of your vehicle

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved

visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,

rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn

on when the fog light switch (1) is turned

on after the parklight is turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light

switch (1) to the O (Off) position.

Rear fog light

To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the

rear fog light switch (1) to the on position

when the headlight is turned on.

Also, the rear fog lights turn on when the

rear fog light switch is turned on after the

front fog light switch (if equipped) is

turned on and the headlight switch is in

the parklight position.

To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear

fog light switch to the on position again.

Daytime running light

(if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can

make it easier for others to see the front

of your vehicle during the day. DRL can

be helpful in many different driving condi-

tions, and it is especially helpful after

dawn and before sunset.

The DRL system will make the head-

lights turn OFF when:

1. The parklight switch is ON.

2. The engine is OFF.

OED040806

OAM049046L

■ Type A

■ Type B

OYN049200

CAUTION

When in operation, the fog lights

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor.

Features of your vehicle

744

Headlight levelling device

(if equipped)

To adjust the headlight beam level

according to the number of the passen-

gers and loading weight in the luggage

area, turn the beam levelling switch.

The higher the number of the switch

position, the lower the headlight beam

level. Always keep the headlight beam at

the proper levelling position, or head-

lights may dazzle other road users.

Listed below are the examples of proper

switch settings. For loading conditions

other than those listed below, adjust the

switch position so that the beam level

may be the nearest as the condition

obtained according to the list.

Loading condition

Driver only

Driver + Front passenger

Full passengers

(including driver)

Full passengers (including

driver) + Maximum per-

missible loading

Driver + Maximum per-

missible loading

Switch position

OYN049047R

475

Features of your vehicle

A : Wiper speed control (front)

· 2 – High wiper speed

· 1 – Low wiper speed

· --- – Intermittent wipe

· AUTO* – Automatic control wipe

· O – Off

· – Single wipe

B : Intermittent control wipe time

adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

D : Rear wiper/washer control

· – Continuous wipe

· --- – Intermittent wipe

· O – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

* : if equipped

Windscreen wipers (front)

Operates as follows when the ignition

switch is turned ON.

: For a single wiping cycle, move the

lever to this position and release it.

The wipers will operate continuously if

the lever is held in this position.

O : Wiper is not in operation

--- : Wiper operates intermittently at the

same wiping intervals. Use this mode

in light rain or mist. To vary the speed

setting, turn the speed control knob.

1 : Normal wiper speed

2 : Fast wiper speed

✽

NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windscreen, defrost the

windscreen for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windscreen wipers to

ensure proper operation.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OXM049230L/OAM049048L

■

Front

■

Rear (if equipped)

Features of your vehicle

764

AUTO (Automatic) control

(if equipped)

The rain sensor located on the upper end

of the windscreen glass senses the

amount of rainfall and controls the wiping

cycle for the proper interval. The more it

rains, the faster the wiper operates. When

the rain stops, the wiper stops.

To vary the speed setting, turn the speed

control knob (1).

If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode

when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper

will operate once to perform a self-check

of the system. Set the wiper to off posi-

tion when the wiper is not in use.

CAUTION

When the ignition switch is ON and

the windscreen wiper switch is

placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-

tion in the following situations to

avoid any injury to the hands or

other parts of the body:

• Do not touch the upper end of the

windscreen glass facing the rain

sensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end of the

windscreen glass with a damp or

wet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on the wind-

screen glass.

OEL049900

Rain sensor

CAUTION

When washing the vehicle, set the

wiper switch in the off position to

stop the auto wiper operation.

The wiper may operate and be dam-

aged if the switch is set in the AUTO

mode whilst washing the vehicle.

Do not remove the sensor cover

located on the upper end of the

driver side windscreen glass.

Damage to system parts could

occur and may not be covered by

your vehicle warranty.

When starting the vehicle in winter,

set the wiper switch in the off posi-

tion. Otherwise, wipers may operate

and ice may damage the wind-

screen wiper blades. Always

remove all snow and ice and defrost

the windscreen properly prior to

operating the windscreen wipers.

477

Features of your vehicle

Windscreen washers (front)

In the O (Off) position, pull the lever gen-

tly toward you to spray washer fluid on

the windscreen and to run the wipers 1-3

cycles.

Use this function when the windscreen is

dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will con-

tinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the

washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not

sufficient, you will need to add appropri-

ate non-abrasive windscreen washer

fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the

front of the engine compartment on the

driver side.

OXM049048E

WARNING

Do not use the washer in freezing

temperatures without first warming

the windscreen with the defrosters;

the washer solution could freeze on

the windscreen and obscure your

vision.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windscreen, do not

operate the wipers when the

windscreen is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use petrol,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

CAUTION

To prevent possible damage to the

washer pump, do not operate the

washer when the fluid reservoir is

empty.

Features of your vehicle

784

Rear window wiper and washer

switch

The rear window wiper and washer

switch is located at the end of the wiper

and washer switch lever. Turn the switch

to desired position to operate the rear

wiper and washer.

- Normal wiper operation

--- - Intermittent wipe

O - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you to spray

rear washer fluid and to run the rear

wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper

operation will continue until you release

the lever.

OXM049103E OXM049125L

479

Features of your vehicle

Room lamp

(1) M

ap lamp (if equipped)

Push the lamp lens to turn the light on or

off. This light produces a spot beam for

convenient use as a map lamp at night or

as a personal lamp for the driver and the

front passenger.

(2)

The light comes on when any door is

opened regardless of the ignition switch

position. When doors are unlocked by the

transmitter or smart key, or the key is

removed from the ignition switch, the

light comes on for approximately 30 sec-

onds as long as any door is not opened.

The light goes out gradually after approx-

imately 30 seconds if the door is closed.

However, if the ignition switch is ON or all

doors are locked, the light will turn off

immediately.

If a door is opened with the ignition

switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the

light stays on for about 20 minutes.

However, if a door is opened with the

ignition switch in the ON position, the

light stays on continuously.

(3)

In the on position, the light stays on at all

times.

(4)

In the off position, the light stays off at all

times, even when a door is open.

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTION

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when engine is

not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

OYN049048

OYN049049

OYN049095

■

ype A

■

ype B

■

ype C

Features of your vehicle

804

✽

NOTICE

If you want to defrost and defog the

front windscreen, refer to “Windscreen

defrosting and defogging” in this sec-

tion.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from the

interior and exterior of the rear window,

whilst engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,

press the rear window defroster button

located in the centre facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window

defroster button illuminates when the

defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on

the rear window, brush it off before oper-

ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 20 minutes

or when the ignition switch is turned off.

To turn off the defroster, press the rear

window defroster button again.

Outside mirror defroster

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with outside

mirror defrosters, they will operate at the

same time when you turn on the rear

window defroster.

Front windscreen deicer

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with front

windscreen deicer, they will operate at

the same time when you turn on the rear

window defroster.

DEFROSTER

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface of

the rear window, never use sharp

instruments or window cleaners

containing abrasives to clean the

window.

OJC040056

OJC040055

■

Man

ual c

limate contr

■

utomatic c

limate contr

- Type A

- Type B

481

Features of your vehicle

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OJC040057/OJC040058

1. A/C (Air conditioning) button

2. Air intake control button

3. Rear window defroster button

4. Mode selection button

5. Temperature control knob

6. Fan speed control knob

■

Type A

■

Type B

Features of your vehicle

824

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heat-

ing and cooling :

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system (if equipped)

on.

OJC040096R

483

Features of your vehicle

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windscreen. Five sym-

bols are used to represent Face, Bi-

Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost

air position.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windscreen and side win-

dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windscreen with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windscreen with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

OJC040059

Features of your vehicle

844

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the thumbwheel. To

close the vent, rotate it left to the maxi-

mum position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows you

to control the temperature of the air flow-

ing from the ventilation system. To

change the air temperature in the pas-

senger compartment, turn the knob to

the right position for warm and hot air or

left position for cooler air.

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) air

position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

press the control button.

OJC040097R OJC040060 OJC040061

■ Type A

■ Type B

485

Features of your vehicle

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

✽

NOTICE

It should be noted that prolonged oper-

ation of the heater in the recirculated air

position (without air conditioning select-

ed) will cause fogging of the windscreen

and side windows and the air within the

passenger compartment will become

stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected will result in excessive-

ly dry air in the passenger compart-

ment.

WARNING

• Continuous operation of the cli-

mate control system in the recir-

culated air position may allow

humidity to increase inside the

vehicle which may fog the glass

and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air

conditioning or heating system

on. It may cause serious harm or

death due to a drop in the oxygen

level and/or body temperature.

• Continuous operation of the cli-

mate control system in the recir-

culated air position can cause

drowsiness or sleepiness, and

loss of vehicle control. Set the air

intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as

possible whilst driving.

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

864

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to

control the fan speed of the air flowing

from the ventilation system. To change

the fan speed, turn the knob to the right

for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the

“0” position turns off the fan.

Air conditioning (A/C)

Press the A/C button to turn the air con-

ditioning system on (indicator light will

illuminate). Press the button again to turn

the air conditioning system off.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode

to the

or position.

OJC040062 OJC040063

487

Features of your vehicle

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from

entering the car through the ventilation

system, temporarily set the air intake

control to the recirculated air position.

Be sure to return the control to the

fresh air position when the irritation

has passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle. This will help keep the driver

alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windscreen. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

screen, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust the temper-

ature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems

are filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant which does not dam-

age the ozone layer.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

✽

NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gauge

closely whilst driving up hills or in

heavy traffic when outside tempera-

tures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the temperature gauge indi-

cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid

weather air conditioning may create

water droplets inside the vehicle.

Since excessive water droplets may

cause damage to electrical equipment,

air conditioning should only be used

with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

Features of your vehicle

884

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month only for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid air

intake. This is a normal system opera-

tion characteristics.

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windscreen even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air filter

replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough roads,

more frequent climate control air fil-

ter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked at a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

489

Features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

✽

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and

amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, damage to the compressor

and abnormal system operation may

occur.

WARNING

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer. Improper service

may cause serious injury to the

person performing the service.

Features of your vehicle

904

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OJC040064/OJC040065

1. AUTO (Automatic) button

2. Climate control display

3. OFF button

4. A/C (Air conditioning) button

5. Front windscreen defroster button

6. Rear window defroster button

7. Air intake control button

8. Mode selection button

9. Temperature control knob

10. Fan speed control knob

■

Type A

■

Type B

491

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air condi-

tioning

The automatic climate control system is

controlled by simply setting the desired

temperature.

The Full Automatic Temperature Control

(FATC) system automatically controls the

heating and cooling system as follows:

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicated

by AUTO on the display. The modes,

fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-

tioning will be controlled automatically

by temperature setting.

2. Turn the temperature control knob to

set the desired temperature.

If the temperature is set to the lowest

setting (Lo), the air conditioning sys-

tem will operate continuously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

• Mode selection button

• Front windscreen defroster button

• Fan speed control knob

The selected function will be controlled

manually whilst other functions operate

automatically.

Regardless of the temperature setting,

when using automatic operation, the air

conditioning system can automatically

turn on to decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle, even if the temperature is set

to warm.

✽

NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to

ensure better control of the heating and

cooling system.

OJC040067OJC040066

Features of your vehicle

924

Manual heating and air condition-

ing

The heating and cooling system can be

controlled manually by pressing buttons

other than the AUTO button. In this case,

the system works sequentially according

to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button (or turning

any knob) except AUTO button whilst

automatic operation, the functions not

selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-

vert to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-

mate control system”.

If you press the button once, the corre-

sponding switch will turn on, and if you

press the button again, the switch will

turn off.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windscreen.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor.

Also you may select 2~3 modes at the

same time for desired air flow.

- face ( ) + floor ( ) mode

- face ( ) + defrost ( ) mode

- floor ( ) + defrost ( ) mode

- face ( ) + floor ( ) + defrost ( )

mode

OJC040068

■ Type A

■ Type B

493

Features of your vehicle

MAX (Maximum) defrost mode

When you select the MAX defrost mode,

the following system settings will be

made automatically:

• The air conditioning system will be

turned on.

• The outside(fresh) air position will be

selected.

• The fan speed will be set to the high

speed.

To turn the MAX defrost mode off, press

the mode button or MAX defrost button

again or AUTO button.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet port can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivered from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to the

maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the

right extremely.

The temperature will decrease to the

minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the

left extremely.

When turning the knob, the temperature

will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.

When set to the lowest temperature set-

ting, the air conditioning will operate con-

tinuously.

OJC040097R OJC040070OJC040069

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

944

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or dis-

connected, the temperature mode dis-

play will reset to Centigrade.

This is normal condition. You can switch

the temperature mode between

Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows:

Whilst pressing the AUTO button, press

the OFF button for 3 seconds or more.

The display will change from Centigrade

to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to

Centigrade.

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) air

position or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the

button illuminates when the

recirculated air position is

selected.

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

passenger compartment

will be drawn through the

heating system and heated

or cooled according to the

function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the

button does not illuminate

when the outside (fresh) air

position is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

OJC040072

■ Type A

■ Type B

495

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

It should be noted that prolonged oper-

ation of the heating in recirculated air

position will cause fogging of the wind-

screen and side windows and the air

within the passenger compartment will

become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected, will result in excessive-

ly dry air in the passenger compart-

ment.

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desired

speed by turning the fan speed control

knob.

To change the fan speed, turn the knob

to the right for higher speed or left for

lower speed.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the

fan.

WARNING

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position may allow humidity to

increase inside vehicle which may

fog the glass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air

conditioning or heating system on.

It may cause serious harm or death

due to a drop in the oxygen level

and/or body temperature.

• Continued climate control system

operation in the recirculated air

position can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, and loss of vehicle

control. Set the air intake control to

the outside (fresh) air position as

much as possible whilst driving.

OJC040071

Features of your vehicle

964

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the air con-

ditioning system on (indicator light will

illuminate).

Press the button again to turn the air

conditioning system off.

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-

mate control system. However you can

still operate the mode and air intake but-

tons as long as the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windscreen even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, have the climate control air filter

replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

OJC040074

OJC040073

497

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty, rough roads,

more frequent climate control air fil-

ter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, the system should be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

✽

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and

amount of oil and refrigerant is used.

Otherwise, damage to the compressor

and abnormal system operation may

occur.

WARNING

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer. Improper service

may cause serious injury to the

person performing the service.

Features of your vehicle

984

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-

perature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whilst

defrosting or defogging, set the mode

to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice

from the windscreen, rear window, out-

side rear view mirrors, and all side win-

dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the bonnet

and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve

heater and defroster efficiency and to

reduce the probability of fogging up

inside of the windscreen.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select any fan speed except “0” posi-

tion.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Select the or position.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected

automatically. Additionally, the air con-

ditioning will automatically operate if

the mode is selected to the posi-

tion.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)

air position are not selected automatical-

ly, press the corresponding button manu-

ally.

WINDSCREEN DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

WARNING - Windscreen

heating

Do not use the or position

during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The dif-

ference between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the wind-

screen could cause the outer sur-

face of the windscreen to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, set the mode selection knob

or button to the position and

fan speed control knob or button to

lower speed.

OJC040075

499

Features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-

tioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambient

temperature, outside (fresh) air posi-

tion and higher fan speed will be

selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air

position and higher fan speed are not

selected automatically, adjust the corre-

sponding button or knob manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.

2. Set temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambient

temperature and outside (fresh) air

position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

OJC040076 OJC040077 OJC040078

Features of your vehicle

1004

Centre console storage

These compartments can be used to

store small items.

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handle

and the glove box will automatically

open. Close the glove box after use.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury in an

accident or sudden stop, always

keep the glove box door closed

whilst driving.

WARNING - Flammable

materials

Do not store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other flamma-

ble/explosive materials in the vehi-

cle. These items may catch fire

and/or explode if the vehicle is

exposed to hot temperatures for

extended periods.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.

• Always keep the storage com-

partment covers closed whilst

driving. Do not attempt to place

so many items in the storage

compartment that the storage

compartment cover cannot close

securely.

OYN049077/H

OYN049076A/H

4101

Features of your vehicle

Glove box cooling (if equipped)

You can keep beverage cans or other

items warm or cool using the open/close

lever of the vent installed in the glove

box.

1. Turn on the fan control switch of the cli-

mate control system.

2. Set the air flow control to the any

mode.

3. Move the open/close lever (1) of the

vent installed in the glove box to the

open ( )position.

4. Set the temperature control to warm or

cool.

When the cool box is not used, turn the

lever to the close (O) position.

✽

NOTICE

Whilst using the cooling function, a

small amount of condensed moisture

could damage pieces of paper.

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

To open the sunglass holder, pull the

cover. Place your sunglasses in the com-

partment door with the lenses facing out.

The cover will close when released.

OJC040111

OYN049078R

OPEN

Features of your vehicle

1024

Luggage box (if equipped)

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector tri-

angle, tools, etc. in the box for easy

access.

To open the cover, grasp the handle on

the top of the cover and lift it.

* The actual feature may differ from the

illustration.

OYN049111

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sun-

glasses inside the sunglass hold-

er. Such objects can be thrown

from the holder in the event of a

sudden stop or an accident, pos-

sibly injuring the passengers in

the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder

whilst the vehicle is moving. The

rear view mirror of the vehicle

can be blocked by an open sun-

glass holder.

4103

Features of your vehicle

INTERIOR FEATURES

LCD monitor (Clock and outside

temperature) (if equipped)

The monitor displays the clock and out-

side temperature.

■

Clock

Whenever the battery terminals or relat-

ed fuses are disconnected, you must

reset the time.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position, the clock buttons operate as

follows:

• H (Hour)

Press the "H" button to advance the time

displayed by one hour.

• M (Minute)

Press the "M" button to advance the time

displayed by one minute.

• Display conversion

To change the 12 hour format to the 24

hour format, press the "H" and "M" button

simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.

For example, if the "H" and "M" button is

pressed whilst the time is 10:15 p.m., the

display will change to 22:15

■

Outside temperature

• Temperature unit conversion (°C↔°F)

To change the temperature unit, press

the "H" and "M" button simultaneously for

approximately 1 second.

The unit will change from °C

(Centigrade) to °F (Fahrenheit) or from

°F (Fahrenheit) to °C (Centigrade).

If your vehicle enters an icy road within

an outside temperature range of -5°C to

3°C (23°F to 37°F), the temperature dig-

its will blink five times and the symbol

( ) will illuminate.

OJC040112

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock whilst driv-

ing. You may lose your steering

control and cause severe personal

injury or accidents.

Features of your vehicle

1044

Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-

tion switch must be in the ACC or ON

position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the

way into its socket. When the element is

heated, the lighter will pop out to the

“ready” position.

If it is necessary to replace the cigarette

lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI

replacement or its approved equivalent.

Ashtray (if equipped)

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.

CAUTION

Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter

should be used in the cigarette

lighter socket. The use of plug-in

accessories (shavers, hand-held

vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may

damage the socket or cause electri-

cal failure.

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after it

is already heated because it will

overheat.

• If the lighter does not pop out

within 30 seconds, remove it to

prevent overheating.

WARNING - Ashtray use

• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays

as waste receptacles.

• Putting lit cigarettes or matches

in an ashtray with other com-

bustible materials may cause a

fire.

OYN049079/HOYN049080R

4105

Features of your vehicle

Cup holder

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

Bottle holder

Bottles may be placed in the holder.

✽

NOTICE

Only bottles should be placee in the

holder as it is written in the vehicle

“BOTTLE ONLY”.

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull

it downward, unsnap it from the bracket

(1) and swing it to the side.

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the

visor and open the mirror cover (2).

To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch it

on. (if equipped)

WARNING - Hot liquids

• Do not place uncovered cups

with hot liquid in the cup holder

whilst the vehicle is in motion. If

the hot liquid spills, you may burn

yourself. Such a burn to the driv-

er could lead to loss of control of

the vehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personal

injury in the event of sudden stop

or collision, do not place uncov-

ered or unsecured bottles, glass-

es, cans, etc., in the cup holder

whilst the vehicle is in motion.

OYN049076/H

OYN049127ROJC040171/H

Features of your vehicle

1064

✽

NOTICE

Close the vanity mirror cover securely

and return the sunvisor to its original

position after use.

❈ To learn how to use the vanity mirror

lamp, refer to "Interior light" in this sec-

tion.

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to provide

power for mobile telephones or other

devices designed to operate with vehicle

electrical systems. The devices should

draw less than 10 amps with the engine

running.

CAUTION - Vanity mirror

lamp (if equipped)

Always have the switch in the off

position when the vanity mirror

lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is

closed without the lamp off, it may

discharge the battery or damage

the sunvisor.

OYN049090R

OYN049131/H

OYN049091

■ Centre

■ Front

■ Rear

CAUTION

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove

the accessory plug after use.

Using the accessory plug for pro-

longed periods of time with the

engine off could cause the bat-

tery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A in elec-

tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet. These devices may

cause excessive audio static and

malfunctions in other electronic

systems or devices used in your

vehicle.

4107

Features of your vehicle

Aux, USB and iPod port

(if equipped)

If your vehicle has an Aux (Auxiliary)

and/or USB (Universal Serial Bus) port

or iPod port, you can use an aux port to

connect audio devices and an USB port

to plug in an USB and also an iPod port

to plug in an iPod.

✽

NOTICE

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise may

occur during playback. If this happens,

use the power source of the portable

audio device.

❈ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Shopping bag holder

(if equipped)

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

OYN049094R

OYN049133

CAUTION

Do not hang heavy clothes, since

those may damage the hook.

OSA047143

CAUTION

Do not hang a bag weighing more

than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause dam-

age to the shopping bag holder.

Features of your vehicle

1084

Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)

When using a floor mat on the front floor

carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor

mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps

the floor mat from sliding forward.

Luggage net holder

To keep items from shifting in the cargo

area, you can use the 4 holders located

in the cargo area (under the floor panel)

to attach the luggage net.

If your vehicle is equipped with a luggage

board, set the board to the lower position

before installing the luggage net.

OYN049113

WARNING

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat to

the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehicle's

floor mat anchor(s) before driving

the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to the

vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of

one another (e.g. all-weather rub-

ber mat on top of a carpeted floor

mat). Only a single floor mat

should be installed in each posi-

tion.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver's side

floor mat anchors that are

designed to securely hold the

floor mat in place. To avoid any

interference with pedal operation,

HYUNDAI recommends that only

the HYUNDAI floor mat designed

for use in your vehicle be

installed.

OEL049222

■ Type A

■ Type B

4109

Features of your vehicle

If necessary, contact a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer to obtain a luggage net.

Luggage board

Two (Upper/Lower) modes are provided

to enable you to use the cargo area as

you like.

• Lower mode: Creates maximum cargo

space.

• Upper mode: May be used with the

rear seatbacks folded.

To use as upper mode:

1. Fold the board and slide it rearwards.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the goods or

the vehicle, care should be taken

when carrying fragile or bulky

objects in the luggage compart-

ment.

WARNING

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-

stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS

keep your face and body out of the

luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT

use when the strap has visible

signs of wear or damage.

OJC040176

OJC040113

OJC040114

■ Upper mode

■ Lower mode

2. Lift the folded board to the upper sup-

port.

3. Slide the board forward and unfold.

To use as lower mode:

Follow the procedure in reverse order

shown in upper mode.

4110

Features of your vehicle

OJC040175

CAUTION

Do not place luggage that weighs

more than 60kg (132lbs.) in the

upper mode and make sure the lug-

gage does not move around the

cargo area.

4111

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

If you install an after market HID head

lamp, your vehicle’s audio and electron-

ic device may malfunction.

Antenna

Roof antenna

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to

receive both AM and FM signals. This

antenna can be removed. To remove the

antenna, turn it counter clockwise, To

install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

AUDIO SYSTEM

OYN049126

CAUTION

• Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash,

remove the antenna by rotating it

counter-clockwise. If not, the

antenna may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it

is important that it is fully tight-

ened to ensure proper reception.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof

rack, do not place the cargo near

the antenna pole to ensure proper

reception.

Features of your vehicle

1124

Audio remote control

(if equipped)

The steering wheel audio remote control

switch is installed to promote safe driv-

ing.

VOL (

) (1)

• Press the lever upward (+ ) to

increase the volume.

• Press the lever downward (− ) to

decrease the volume.

SEEK ( / ) (2)

The SEEK/PRESET button has different

functions based on the system mode.

For the following functions the button

should be pressed for 0.8 seconds or

more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select

button.

CD/USB/ iPod mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed

for less than 0.8 second, it will work as

follows in each mode.

CAUTION

Do not operate the audio remote

control switches simultaneously.

OJC040115

■ Type A

OJC040116

■ Type B

4113

Features of your vehicle

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION

buttons.

CD/USB/ iPod mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN

button.

MODE (3)

Press the button to select Radio or CD

(compact disc).

MUTE (4)

• Press the MUTE button to cancel the

sound.

• Press the MUTE button again to acti-

vate the sound.

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast

from transmitter towers located around

your city. They are intercepted by the

radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal

is then received by the radio and sent to

your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached

your vehicle, the precise engineering of

your audio system ensures the best pos-

sible quality reproduction. However, in

some cases the signal coming to your

vehicle may not be strong and clear. This

can be due to factors such as the dis-

tance from the radio station, closeness of

other strong radio stations or the pres-

ence of buildings, bridges or other large

obstructions in the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broadcasts.

This is because AM radio waves are

transmitted at low frequencies. These

long, low frequency radio waves can fol-

low the curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight out into the atmos-

phere. In addition, they curve around

obstructions so that they can provide bet-

ter signal coverage.

JBM002

AM reception

JBM001

FM reception

Features of your vehicle

1144

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high

frequencies and do not bend to follow the

earth's surface. Because of this, FM

broadcasts generally begin to fade at

short distances from the station.

Also, FM signals are easily affected by

buildings, mountains, or other obstruc-

tions. These can result in certain listening

conditions which might lead you to

believe a problem exists with your radio.

The following conditions are normal and

do not indicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away

from the radio station, the signal will

weaken and sound will begin to fade.

When this occurs, we suggest that you

select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the trans-

mitter and your radio can disturb the

signal causing static or fluttering nois-

es to occur. Reducing the treble level

may lessen this effect until the distur-

bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal

weakens, another more powerful sig-

nal near the same frequency may

begin to play. This is because your

radio is designed to lock onto the clear-

est signal. If this occurs, select another

station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals

being received from several directions

can cause distortion or fluttering. This

can be caused by a direct and reflect-

ed signal from the same station, or by

signals from two stations with close

frequencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition has

passed.

JBM005JBM004JBM003

FM radio station

4115

Features of your vehicle

Using a mobile phone or a two-way

radio

When a mobile phone is used inside the

vehicle, noise may be produced from the

audio equipment. This does not mean

that something is wrong with the audio

equipment. In such a case, use the

mobile phone at a place as far as possi-

ble from the audio equipment.

Care of disc

• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows for ventila-

tion before using your car audio.

• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA

files without permission. Use CDs that

are created only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents such as

benzene and thinner, normal cleaners

and magnetic sprays made for ana-

logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-

ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by

the edges or the edges of the centre

hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of

soft cloth before playback (wipe it from

the centre to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface or

attach pieces of sticky tape or paper

onto it.

• Make sure on undesirable matter other

than CDs are inserted into the CD

player (Do not insert more than one

CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to

protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-

RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate

normally according to manufacturing

companies or making and recording

methods. In such circumstances, if you

still continue to use those CDs, they

may cause the malfunction of your car

audio system.

✽

NOTICE - Playing an

Incompatible Copy

Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not

comply with the international audio CD

standards (Red Book), may not play on

your car audio. Please note that if you

try to play copy protected CDs and the

CD player does not perform correctly

the CDs maybe defective, not the CD

player.

CAUTION

When using a communication sys-

tem such a mobile phone or a radio

set inside the vehicle, a separate

external antenna must be fitted.

When a mobile phone or a radio set

is used with an internal antenna

alone, it may interfere with the vehi-

cle's electrical system and adverse-

ly affect safe operation of the vehi-

cle.

WARNING

Do not use a mobile phone whilst

driving. Stop at a safe location to

use a mobile phone.

Features of your vehicle

1164

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

■

CD Player : PA710JCE

❋There will be no logo if the Bluetooth

feature is not supported.

4117

Features of your vehicle

Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME

and AUDIO CONTROL

1. Button

Turns on FM mode. Each press of the

button will change the band in

the order of FM1

➟FM2➟FMA➟FM1...

2. Button

Turns on AM mode. Each press of the

button will change the band in

the order of AM

➟AMA➟AM...

3. Button

TA (Traffic announcement) Channels in

FM, CD, AUX mode, turns on/off the

reception of TA channels of RDS.

4. Button

• When the is pressed, it will

automatically tune to the next lower

station.

• When the is pressed, it will

automatically tune to the next higher

station.

5. Button & Knob

• Turns the audio system on/off when

the ignition switch is on ACC or ON.

• If the knob is turned clockwise/counter-

clockwise, the volume will increase

/decrease.

• Depending on the model if the ignition

switch is not on ACC or ON position.

the “Battery Discharge” warning

appears on LCD after 10 seconds of

power-up, and automatically turns off

after 1 hours of operation.

6. PRESET Buttons

• Press ~ buttons less

than 0.8 seconds to play the station

saved in each button.

• Press ~ buttons more

than 0.8 seconds or longer to save the

current station to the respective button

with a beep.

7. Button

Turn the LCD Display&Backlight ON/OFF

when button press.

DARK

VOLPOWER

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

Features of your vehicle

1184

8. Button

When the button is pressed, it automati-

cally selects and saves channels with

high reception rate to PRESET buttons

~ and plays the channel

saved in PRESET1. If no channel is

saved after AST, it will play the previous

channel.

• Saves only to the Preset memory

~ of FMA or AMA mode

in some models.

9. Button

• Moves Button when search-

ing PTY in RDS Broadcasting Program

Type selection.

• Moves button when search-

ing PTY in RDS Broadcasting Program

Type selection.

10. Button

Press this button to enter SETUP mode,

If no action is taken for 8 seconds, it will

return to previous mode.

In “SETUP” mode, rotate the TUNE knob

to move the cursor between items, and

push the TUNE knob to select.

• SCROLL

Select whether long file names are

scrolled continuously (On) or just once

(Off).

• SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume

Control)

Select this item to turn the SDVC feature

On or Off. If it is turned ON, volume level

is adjusted automatically according to

the vehicle speed.

• MEDIA

Select default display of MP3 play infor-

mation. “Folder/File” or “Artist/Title” can

be selected.

SETUP

PTY

FLDR

PTY

FLDR

PTY

AST

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

4119

Features of your vehicle

• RDS (if available)

RDS menuancludes News/AF/Region/TA

Vol menu sequentially.

• NEWS (NEWS MENU indication is pos-

sible with RDS MENU)

Turns the automatic NEWS reception

feature ON or OFF.

• AF (AF MENU indication is possible

with RDS MENU)

Select this item to turn the AF (Alternate

Frequency) feature ON or OFF.

• TA VOL (TA VOL MENU indication is

possible with RDS MENU)

Adjusts the TA (Traffic Announcement)

volume level according to normal audio

volume level.

• REGION (REGION MENU indication is

possible with RDS MENU)

Selects whether REGION code is used

(ON) or not (OFF) once the radio deter-

mines the AF jump condition. If AUTO is

selected, AF jump condition is deter-

mined automatically via PI reception sta-

tus.

• PHONE (if available)

Select this item to enter BLUETOOTH

setup mode. Refer to “BLUETOOTH

PHONE OPERATION” section for

detailed information.

Features of your vehicle

1204

11. & Knob

Rotate the knob clockwise or counter-

clock wise to increase or decrease from

current frequency.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,

MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-

ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected

is shown on the display. After selecting

each mode, rotate the Audio control knob

clockwise or counterclockwise.

• BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the BASS,

rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the MID-

DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob

clockwise, whilst to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to

emphasize rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated). When

the control knob is turned counterclock-

wise, front speaker sound will be empha-

sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-

ated).

• BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize

right speaker sound (left speaker sound

will be attenuated). When the control

knob is turned counter clockwise, left

speaker sound will be emphasized (right

speaker sound will be attenuated).

Audio ControlTUNE

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

4121

Features of your vehicle

Using CD Player

1. Button (CD)

If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode.

If no CD, it displays “No Media” for 3 sec-

onds and returns to the previous mode.

2. Button

• Press button for less than

0.8 seconds to play from the beginning

of current song.

• Press button for less than

0.8 seconds and press again within

1 second to play the previous song.

• Press button for 0.8 seconds

or longer to initiate reverse direction

high speed sound search of current

song.

• Press button for less than

0.8 seconds to play the next song.

• Press button for 0.8 seconds

or longer to initiate forward direction

high speed sound search of current

song.

3. Button (RANDOM)

Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more

than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’

mode.

• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc

are played back in a random

sequence.

• ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in

a disc are played back in the random

sequence.

4. Button (REPEAT)

Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds to activate 'RPT' mode and more

than 0.8 seconds to activate 'FLD RPT'

mode.

• RPT : Only a track (file) is repeatedly

played back.

• FLD RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files

in a folder are repeatedly played back.

5. Button

Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds.

To cancel SCAN Play, press this button

again.

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

MEDIA

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

Features of your vehicle

1224

6. Button

Displays the information of the current

song.

• Audio CD : Disc Title/Artist, Track Title

/Artist, Total Track.

• MP3 CD : File Name, Title, Artist,

Album, Folder, Total Files (Not dis-

played if the information is unavailable

on the CD or file.)

7. Button (FOLDER)

• Press button to move to

child folder of the current folder and

display the first song in the folder.

Press knob to move to the fold-

er displayed. It will play the first song in

the folder.

• Press button to move to par-

ent folder of the current folder and dis-

play the first song in the folder.

Press knob to move to the fold-

er displayed.

8. Knob & Button

Turn this button clockwise to display the

songs next to the currently played song.

Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-

play the songs before the currently

played song. Press the button to skip and

play the selected song.

9. CD Eject Button

Push button for less than 0.8

seconds to eject the CD during CD play-

back. This button is enabled when igni-

tion switch is off.

10. CD Slot

Insert a CD label side up and gently push

in whilst ignition switch is on ACC or ON.

The audio automatically switches to CD

mode and begins to play the CD.

If the audio was turned off, audio power

will automatically turned on as the CD is

inserted.

• This audio only recognizes 12cm-size,

CD-DA (Audio CD) or ISO data-CD

(MP3 CD).

• If UDF data-CD or non-CD (e.g. DVD)

is inserted, "Reading Error" message

will be displayed and the disc will be

ejected.

11. CD Indicator icon

When car ignition switch is ACC or ON

and if the CD is loaded, this indicator

icon is on. If the CD is ejected the icon is

off.

ENTERTUNE

TUNE

PTY

FLDR

TUNE

PTY

FLDR

INFO

CAUTION

Do not insert a CD if CD indicator is

lit.

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

4123

Features of your vehicle

NOTE:

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order : to

sequentially.

2. Folder playing order :

❋ If no song file is contained in the

folder, that folder is not displayed.

Features of your vehicle

1244

CAUTION IN USING USB

DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,

make sure the device is not con-

nected when starting up the vehi-

cle. Connect the device after

starting up.

• If you start the engine when the

USB device is connected, it may

damage the USB device. (USB

flashdrives are very sensitive to

electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or

turned off whilst the external USB

device is connected, the external

USB device may not work.

• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or

WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between

8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music

files with the compression rate

between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static elec-

tricity when connecting or dis-

connecting the external USB

device.

(Continued)

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not

recognizable.

• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, the con-

nected external USB device can

be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector

setting of External USB device is

not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,

then the device will not be recog-

nized.

• Use only a USB device formatted

to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F

authentication may not be recog-

nizable.

• Make sure the USB connection

terminal does not come in con-

tact with the human body or other

objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or dis-

connect the USB device in a short

period of time, it may break the

device.

• You may hear a strange noise

when connecting or disconnect-

ing a USB device.

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external

USB device during playback in

USB mode, the external USB

device can be damaged or may

malfunction. Therefore, discon-

nect the external USB device

when the audio is turned off or in

another mode. (e.g, Radio or CD)

• Depending on the type and

capacity of the external USB

device or the type of the files

stored in the device, there is a dif-

ference in the time taken for

recognition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device for

purposes other than playing

music files.

• Use of USB accessories such as

rechargers or heaters using USB

I/F may lower performance or

cause trouble.

• If you use devices such as a USB

hub purchased separately, the

vehicle’s audio system may not

recognize the USB device. In that

case, connect the USB device

directly to the multimedia termi-

nal of the vehicle.

(Continued)

4125

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• If the USB device is divided by

logical drives, only the music files

on the highest-priority drive are

recognized by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/

Mobile phone/Digital camera can

be unrecognizable by standard

USB I/F can be unrecognizable.

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can

be unrecognizable.

• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or

external-HDD type devices can be

unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM

(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-

MENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory may

be lost whilst using this audio.

Always back up important data on

a personal storage device.

(Continued)

• Please avoid using USB memory

products which can be used as

key chains or mobile phone

accessories as they could cause

damage to the USB jack. Please

make certain only to use plug

type connector products as

shown below.

Features of your vehicle

1264

Using USB device

1. Button (USB)

If USB is connected, it switches to the

USB mode from the other mode to play

the song files stored in the USB. If no CD

and auxiliary device is not connected, it

displays "NO Media" for 3 seconds and

returns to the previous mode.

2. Button

• Press the button for less

than 0.8 seconds to play from the

beginning of the current song.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec

onds and press it again within 1 sec-

ond to move to and play the previous

song.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to play the song in reverse

direction in fast speed.

• Press the button for less

than 0.8 seconds to move to the next

song. Press the button for 0.8 seconds

or longer to play the song in forward

direction in fast speed.

3. Button (RANDOM)

• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds to play songs randomly in current

folder.

• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to play songs randomly in entire

USB device.

• To cancel RANDOM play, press this

button again.

4. Button (REPEAT)

• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds to repeat current song.

• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to repeat all songs in current

folder.

• To cancel REPEAT, press this button

again.

5. Button

Plays each song in the USB device for 10

seconds. To cancel SCAN Play, press

this button again.

6. Button

Displays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of

File Name ➟ Title ➟ Artist ➟ Album ➟

Folder ➟ Total File ➟ Normal Display ➟

File Name... (Displays no information if

the file has no song information.)

INFO

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

MEDIA

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

4127

Features of your vehicle

7. Button (FOLDER)

• Press button to move to

child folder of the current folder and

display the first song in the folder.

Press / knob to move

to the folder displayed. It will play the

first song in the folder.

• Press button to move to par-

ent folder display the first song in the

folder.

Press / knob to move

to the folder displayed.

8. Knob & Button

• Turn this knob clockwise to browse

songs after current song, or counter

clockwise to browse songs before cur-

rent song. To play the displayed song,

press the knob.

• Pressing this knob without turning

enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.

ENTERTUNE

PTY

FLDR

ENTERTUNE

PTY

FLDR

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

Features of your vehicle

1284

✽

NOTICE FOR USING THE

iPod DEVICE

• Some iPod models might not support

the communication protocol and the

files will not be played.

Supported iPod models:

- iPod Mini

- iPod 4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic) gen-

eration

- iPod Nano 1st~4th generation

- iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation

• The order of search or playback of

songs in the iPod can be different

from the order searched in the audio

system.

• If the iPod disabled due to its own

malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:

Refer to iPod manual)

• An iPod may not operate normally on

low battery.

• Some iPod devices, such as the

iPhone, can be connected through the

Bluetooth

interface. The device must

have audio Bluetooth

capability

(such as for stereo headphone

Bluetooth

). The device can play, but

it will not be controlled by the audio

system.

CAUTION IN USING THE

iPod DEVICE

• The Hyundai iPod Power Cable is

needed in order to operate iPod

with the audio buttons on the

audio system. The USB cable pro-

vided by Apple may cause mal-

function and should not be used

for Hyundai vehicles.

❋

The Hyundai iPod Power Cable

may be purchased through

your Hyundai Dealership.

• When connecting iPod with the

iPod Power Cable, insert the con-

nector to the multimedia socket

completely. If not inserted com-

pletely, communications between

iPod and audio may be interrupt-

ed.

• When adjusting the sound effects

of the iPod and the audio system,

the sound effects of both devices

will overlap and might reduce or

distort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer

function of an iPod when adjust-

ing the audio system’s volume,

and turn off the equalizer of the

audio system when using the

equalizer of an iPod.

(Continued)

• When the iPod cable is connect-

ed, the system can be switched to

AUX mode even without iPod

device and may cause noise.

Disconnect the iPod cable when

you are not using the iPod device.

• When not using iPod with car

audio, detach the iPod cable from

iPod. Otherwise, iPod may remain

in accessory mode, and may not

work properly.

4129

Features of your vehicle

Using iPod

1. Button (iPod)

If iPod is connected, it switches to the

iPod mode from the previous mode to

play the song files stored in the iPod.

If there is no iPod connected, then it dis-

plays the message "No Media" for 3 sec-

onds and returns to the previous mode.

2. Button

• Press the button for less

than 0.8 seconds to play from the

beginning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds and press it again within 1 sec-

ond to move to and play the previous

track.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to play the song in reverse

direction in fast speed.

• Press the button for less

than 0.8 seconds to move to the next

track.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to play the song in forward

direction in fast speed.

3. Button (RANDOM)

• Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds to shuffle order of all songs in

current category. (Song Random)

• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to shuffle order of albums in cur-

rent category. (Album Random)

• To cancel RANDOM Play, press this

button again.

4. Button (REPEAT)

Repeats the song currently played.

5. Button (MENU)

Moves to the upper category from cur-

rently played category of the iPod.

To move to (play) the category (song)

displayed, press knob.

You will be able to search through the

lower category of the selected category.

The order of iPod’s category is Playlist,

Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs,

Composers.

6. Button

Displays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of Title ➟ Artist

➟ Album ➟ Normal Display ➟ Title...

(Displays no information if the file has no

song information.)

INFO

TUNE

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

MEDIA

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

Features of your vehicle

1304

7. Knob & Button

When you rotate the knob clockwise, it

will display the songs (category) ahead

of the song currently played (category in

the same level).

Also, when you rotate the knob counter-

clockwise, it will display the songs (cate-

gory) before the song currently played

(category in the same level).

To listen to the song displayed in the

song category, press the button to skip to

and play the selected song.

ENTERTUNE

JC_PA710JCE_AUDIO

4131

Features of your vehicle

CAUTION IN USING

BLUETOOTH

MOBILE

PHONE

• Do not use a mobile phone or per-

form Bluetooth

settings (e.g.

pairing a phone) whilst driving.

• Some Bluetooth

-enabled phones

may not be recognized by the

system or fully compatible with

the system.

• Before using Bluetooth

features of the audio system,

refer your phone’s User’s Manual

for phone-side Bluetooth

opera-

tions.

•

The phone must be paired to the

audio system to use Bluetooth

related features.

• You will not be able to use the

hands-free feature when your

phone (in the car) is outside of

the mobile service area (e.g. in a

tunnel, in a underground, in a

mountainous area, etc.).

• If the mobile phone signal is poor

or the vehicles interior noise is

too loud, it may be difficult to hear

the other person’s voice during a

call.

(Continued)

(continued)

• Do not place the phone near or

inside metallic objects, otherwise

communications with Bluetooth

system or mobile service stations

can be disturbed.

• Whilst a phone is connected

through Bluetooth

your phone

may discharge quicker than usual

for additional Bluetooth

-related

operations.

• Some mobile phones or other

devices may cause interference

noise or malfunction to audio

system. In this case, storing the

device in a different location may

resolve the situation.

Features of your vehicle

1324

BLUETOOTH

PHONE OPERA-

TION (if equipped)

1. button : Raises or lowers

speaker volume.

2. button : Places and transfers

calls.

3. button : Ends calls or cancels

functions.

4. button : Activates voice recog-

nition.

■

What is Bluetooth

Bluetooth

is a wireless technology that

allows multiple devices to be connected

in a short range, low-powered devices

like hands-free, stereo headset, steering

remote control, etc. For more informa-

tion, visit the Bluetooth

website at

www.Bluetooth.com

■

General Features

• This audio system supports Bluetooth

hands-free and stereo-headset fea-

tures.

- HANDS-FREE feature: Making or

receiving calls wirelessly through

voice recognition.

- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing

music from mobile phones (that sup-

ports A2DP feature) wirelessly.

• Voice recognition engine of the

Bluetooth

system supports 10 types of

languages:

FRENCH

GERMAN

UK ENGLISH

SPANISH

DUTCH

ITALIAN

DANISH

RUSSIAN

POLISH

SWEDISH

TA L K

END

CALL

VOLUME

4133

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

• The phone must be paired to the sys-

tem before using Bluetooth

features.

• Only one selected (linked) mobile

phone can be used with the system at

a time.

• Some phones are not fully compatible

with this system.

• The Bluetooth

word mark and logos

are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by Hyundai is under

license. A Bluetooth enabled cell

phone is required to use Bluetooth

wireless technology.

■

Bluetooth

Language Setting

The system language can be changed by

the following steps:

1. Power on the audio system with the

volume set to an audible level.

2. Press and hold button on the

steering wheel until the audio displays

“Please Wait”.

- The Bluetooth

system will reply in

currently selected language that it is

changing to the next language.

- System language cycles between

FRENCH/ GERMAN/ UK ENGLISH

SPANISH/ DUTCH/ ITALIAN/

DANISH/ RUSSIAN/ POLISH/

SWEDISH.

3. When completed, the audio display

returns to normal.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the next lan-

guage selection.

NOTE:

The phone needs to be paired again

after changing system language.

- Avoid resting your thumb or finger

on the button as the language

could unintentionally change.

■

Voice Recognition Activation

• The voice recognition engine contained

in the Bluetooth

System can be acti-

vated in the following conditions:

- Button Activation

The voice recognition system will be

active when the button is pressed

and after the sound of a Beep.

- Active Listening

The voice recognition system will be

active for a period of time when the

Voice Recognition system has asked

for a customer response.

• The system can recognize single digits

from zero to nine whilst number greater

than ten will not be recognized.

• If the command is not recognized, the

system will announce "Pardon" or No

input voice signal from microphone. (No

response)

• The system shall cancel voice recogni-

tion mode in following cases : When

pressing the button and saying

cancel following the beep. When not

making a call and pressing the

button. When voice recognition has

failed 3 consecutive times.

Features of your vehicle

1344

• At any time if you say “help”, the system

will announce what commands are

available.

■

Menu tree

The menu tree identifies available voice

recognition Bluetooth

functions.

■

Voice Operation Tip

To get the best performance out of the

Voice Recognition System, observe the

followings:

- Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the window to elim-

inate surrounding noise (traffic noise,

vibration sounds, etc), which may dis-

turb recognizing the voice command

correctly.

- Speak a command after a beep sound

within 5 seconds. Otherwise the com-

mand will not be received properly.

- Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

■

Information Display

The Bluetooth

icon appears on the

upper side of audio display when a

phone is connected.

Pair phone

Select phone

Change priority

Delete phone

Bluetooth off

Setup

Add entryPhonebook

Change

Delete name

By Phone

By voice

Call By name

By number

4135

Features of your vehicle

■

Phone Setup

All Bluetooth

related operations can be

performed by voice command or by man-

ual operation.

- By Voice Command:

Press button on the steering wheel

to activate voice recognition.

- By Manual Operation:

1) Push the “SETUP” button to enter

SETUP mode.

2) Select “PHONE” item by rotating the

TUNE knob, then push the knob.

3) Select desired item by rotating the

TUNE knob, then push the knob.

• Pairing phone

Before using Bluetooth

features, the

phone must be paired (registered) to the

audio system. Up to 5 phones can be

paired with the system.

NOTE:

The pairing procedure of the phone

varies according to each phone

model. Before attempting to pair

phone, please see your phone’s

User’s Guide for instructions.

NOTE:

Once pairing with the phone is com-

pleted, there is no need to pair with

that phone again unless the phone is

deleted manually from the audio sys-

tem (refer “Deleting Phone” section)

or the vehicle’s information is

removed from the phone.

1. Press button.

2. Say “Set Up”.

- The system replies with available

commands.

- To skip the information message,

press again and then a beep is

heard.

3. Say “Pair Phone”

4. Proceed at next step.

5. Say the name of your phone when

prompted.

- Use any name to uniquely describe

your phone.

- Use Full name to voice tag.

- Not use to short name or similar to

voice command.

6. Bluetooth

system will repeat the

name you stated.

7. Say “Yes” to confirm.

Features of your vehicle

1364

8. The audio displays “searching

----

passkey: 0000” and asks you to initiate

pairing procedure from the phone.

9. Search the Bluetooth

system on your

phone .Your phone should display your

[vehicle model name] on the

Bluetooth

device list. Then attempt

pairing on your phone.

10. After Pairing is completed, your

phone will start to transfer

phone/contact list to the audio sys-

tem.

- This process may take from a few

minutes to over 10 minutes depend-

ing on the phone model and number

of entries in the phone/contact list.

11. By manual operation:

- Select “PAIR” in PHONE menu, then

proceed from step 5.

NOTE:

• Until the audio displays “Transfer

Complete”, Bluetooth

hands-free

feature may not be fully operational.

• Depending on the phone make and

model, the phone book contact list

mat not transfer to the audio system.

NOTE:

If the phone is paired to two or more

vehicles of the same model, i.e. both

vehicles are ix20, some phones may

not handle Bluetooth

devices of that

name correctly. In this case, you may

need to change the name displayed

on your phone from ix20 to ix20A and

ix20B.

Refer to your phone’s User’s Guide, or

contact your mobile carrier or phone

manufacturer for instructions.

• Connecting phone

When the Bluetooth

system is enabled,

the phone previously used is automati-

cally selected and re-connected. If you

want to select different phone previously

paired, the phone can be selected

through “Select Phone” menu.

Only a selected phone can be used with

the hands-free system at a time.

1. Press button.

2. Say “Set Up”.

3. Say “Select Phone” after prompt

- The system lists all the registered

phone names.

4. Say the name or number of desired

phone from the list.

5. Say “Yes” to confirm.

6. By manual operation:

- Select “SELECT” in PHONE menu,

then select desired phone from the

list.

4137

Features of your vehicle

• Deleting Phone

The paired phone can be deleted.

- When the phone is deleted, all the infor-

mation associated with that phone is

also deleted (including phonebook).

- If you want to use the deleted phone

with the audio system again, pairing

procedure must be completed once

more.

1.Press button.

2.Say “Set Up”.

3.Say “Delete Phone” after prompt.

- The system lists all the registered

phone names.

4.Say the name or number of desired

phone from the list.

5.Say “Yes” to confirm.

6.By manual operation:

- Select “DELETE” in PHONE menu,

then select desired phone from the

list.

• Changing Priority

When several phones are paired to the

audio system, the system attempts to

connect following order when the

Bluetooth

is enabled:

1) “Priority” checked phone.

2) Previously connected phone

3) Gives up auto connection.

1. Press button.

2. Say “Set Up”.

3. Say “Change Priority” after prompt.

- The system lists all the registered

phone names.

4. Say the name or number of desired

phone from the list.

5. Say “Yes” to confirm.

6. By manual operation:

- Select “PRIORITY” in PHONE menu,

then select desired phone from the

list.

• Adjusting Bluetooth

•

language

Select “BT Voice Recognition language”

in PHONE menu, adjust language to

desired language by turning the

knob, then press the knob again to con-

firm.

- Supported Languages: FRENCH/

GERMAN/ UK ENGLISH/ SPANISH/

DUTCH/ ITALIAN/ DANISH/ RUSSIAN/

POLISH/ SWEDISH.

NOTE:

The Phone need to be paired again

after changing system language.

• Avoid resting your thumb or finger

on the talk button as the language

could unintentionally change.

TUNE

Features of your vehicle

1384

• Turning Bluetooth

ON/OFF

Bluetooth

system can be enabled (ON)

or disabled (OFF) by this menu.

- If Bluetooth

is disabled, all the com-

mands related to Bluetooth

system

prompts whether you wish to turn

Bluetooth

ON or not.

1. Press button.

2. Say “Set Up”

3. Say “Bluetooth Off” after prompt.

4. Say “Yes” to confirm.

5. By manual operation:

- Select “BT Off” in PHONE menu,

then after announcement, say “YES”

to confirm.

■

Phone Book (In-Vehicle)

• Adding Entry

Phone numbers and voice tags can be

registered. Entries registered in the

phone can also be transferred.

• Adding Entry by Voice

1. Press button.

2. Say "Phonebook".

- The system replies with all available

commands.

- To skip the information message,

press again and then a beep is

heard.

3. Say “Add Entry”.

4. Say “By Voice” to proceed.

5. Say the name of the entry when

prompted.

6. Say “Yes” to confirm.

7. Say the phone number of that entry

when prompted.

8. Say “Store” if phone number input is

finished.

9. Say a phone number type. “Home”,

“Work”, “Mobile”, “Other” or “Default” is

available.

10. Say “Yes” to complete adding entry.

11. Say “Yes” to store additional location

for this contact, or say “Cancel” to fin-

ish the process.

✽

NOTICE

- The system can recognize single digits

from zero to nine. Numbers that are

ten or greater cannot be recognized.

- You can enter each digit individually

or group digits together in preferred

string lengths.

- To speed up input, it is a good idea to

group all digits into a continuous

string.

- Recommend to enter the numbers

constituted an grouping within all

digit numbers to dial 995 / 734 / 0000

- The display corresponding to each

operation appears on the screen as fol-

lows:

Input operation example:

1. Say: “Nine, nine, five”

➟ Display: “995”

2. And say: “Seven, three, four”

➟ Display: “995734”

4139

Features of your vehicle

• Adding Entry by Phone

1. Press button.

2. Say “Phonebook”.

3. Say “Add Entry” after prompt.

4. Say “By Phone” to proceed.

5. Say “Yes” to confirm.

6.Your phone will start to transfer

phone/contact list to the audio system.

This process may take over 10 minutes

depending on the phone model and

number of entries

7. Wait till the audio displays “Transfer

Complete” message.

• Changing Name

The registered names can be modified.

1.Press button.

2.Say “Phonebook”.

3.Say “Change Name” after prompt.

4.Say the name of the entry (voice tag).

5.Say “Yes” to confirm.

6.Say new desired name.

• Deleting Name

The registered names can be deleted.

1.Press button.

2.Say “Phonebook”.

3.Say “Delete Name” after prompt.

4.Say the name of the entry (voice tag).

5.Say “Yes” to confirm.

■

Making a Phone Call

• Calling by Name

A phone call can be made by speaking

names registered in the audio system.

1. Press button.

2. Say “Call”.

3. Say “Name” when prompted.

4. Say desired name (voice tag).

5. Say desired location (phone number

type). Only stored locations can be

selected.

6. Say “Yes” to confirm and make a call.

✽

Tip

A shortcut to each of the following func-

tions is available:

1. Say “Call Name”

2. Say “Call <john>”

3. Say “Call <john> at <home>”

• Dialing by Number

A phone call can be made by dialing the

spoken numbers. The system can recog-

nize single digits from zero to nine.

1.Press button.

2.Say “Call”.

3.Say “Number” when prompted.

4.Say desired phone numbers.

5.Say “Dial” to complete the number and

make a call.

✽

Tip

A shortcut to each of the following func-

tions is available:

1. Say “Dial Number”

2. Say “Dial <digit>”

Features of your vehicle

1404

■

Receiving a Phone Call

When receiving a phone call, a ringtone

is audible from speakers and the audio

system changes into telephone mode.

When receiving a phone call, “Incoming

call” message and incoming phone num-

ber (if available) are displayed on the

audio.

• To Answer a Call:

- Press button on the steering

wheel.

• To Reject a Call:

- Press button on the steering

wheel.

• To Adjust Ring Volume:

- Use VOLUME buttons on the steering

wheel.

• To Transfer a Call to the Phone (Secret

Call):

- Press button on the steering

wheel until the audio system transfers a

call to the phone.

■

Talking on the Phone

When talking on the phone, “Active Call”

message and the other party’s phone

number (if available) are displayed on the

audio.

• To Mute the Microphone

- Press button on the steering

wheel.

• To Finish a Call

- Press button on the steering

wheel.

✽

NOTICE

In the following situations, you or the

other party may have difficulty hearing

each other:

1. Speaking at the same time, your voice

may not reach each other parties.

(This is not a malfunction.) Speak

alternately with the other party on the

phone.

2. Keep the Bluetooth

volume to a low

level. High-level volume may result in

distortion and echo.

3. When driving on a rough road.

4. When driving at high speeds.

5. When the window is open.

6. When the air conditioning vents are

facing the microphone.

7. When the sound of the air condition-

ing fan is loud.

■

Bluetooth

Audio Music

Streaming

The audio system supports Bluetooth

A2DP (Audio Advanced Distribution

Profile) and AVRCP (Audio Video

Remote Control Profile) technologies.

Both profiles provide steaming of music

via compatible “PAIRED” Bluetooth

Mobile phone.

To stream music from the Bluetooth

mobile phone, play your music files on

your mobile phone according to your

mobile phone user’s manual and press

the button on the audio system

until “MP3 play” is displayed on the LCD.

The audio system head unit displays

‘MP3 MODE’.

CD/AUX

MUTE

4141

Features of your vehicle

NOTE:

• In addition to streaming MP3 files,

all music and sound files your

mobile phone supports can be

played by the audio system.

• Bluetooth

compatible mobile

phones must include A2DP and

AVRCP capabilities.

• Some A2DP and AVRCP compatible

Bluetooth

mobile phones may not

play music through the audio sys-

tem initially. These mobile phones

may need to have the Bluetooth

streaming enabled, for example;

i.e : Menu

➟Filemanager➟Music➟

Option➟Play via Bluetooth

• Please refer to User’s Guide for your

mobile phone for more information.

To cancel Bluetooth

mobile phone

music streaming, stop music play-

back on the mobile phone or

change the audio mode to AM/FM,

CD, iPod, ect.

■

Key matrix

No.

Class

Paired H/P

Empty

Disconnected

SHORT

LONG

SHORT

LONG

[10sec]

LONG

[10sec]

Normal mode

BT SETUP menu

Incoming Call

Outgoing Call

Active Call

2nd Call

Not Paired Not Connecting

Accept Call

Connected

2nd call

1st Call:waiting

2nd Call:active

2nd Call

2nd Call:waiting

1st Call:active

KEY

Transfer call:secret call

End Call

MODE Cancel

Reject Call End Call End Call

Active

Change

language

Active

Speaker

Adaptation

(Only English)

Change

language

Active

Change

language

Active

Speaker

Adaptation

(Only English)

Change

language

4142

Features of your vehicle

Before driving / 5-3

Key positions / 5-4

Engine start/stop button / 5-8

ISG (Idle stop and go) system / 5-14

Manual transaxle / 5-18

Automatic transaxle / 5-21

Brake system / 5-26

Cruise control system / 5-36

Speed limit control system / 5-41

Economical operation / 5-43

Special driving conditions / 5-45

Winter driving / 5-50

Trailer towing / 5-54

Vehicle weight / 5-62

Driving your vehicle

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust gases are potentially lethal. If at any time engine exhaust gas is detected within the passenger compartment,

move the vehicle to an open area and open all windows.

• Never inhale exhaust gas.

Exhaust gases contain Carbon Monoxide which is colourless and odourless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause

unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

• Exhaust System Maintenance.

Ensure that the exhaust system is maintained in good condition and is free from excessive corrosion and damage which may

result in leakage. If the vehicle is driven over an object which strikes the exhaust system, ensure that the exhaust system is

inspected at the first available opportunity to ensure that no leakage exists.

• Confined Areas.

Do not run the engine in confined spaces, allowing the engine to idle in a garage, even when the doors are open is dangerous

practice. Only start the engine immediately prior to moving the vehicle out of the garage.

• Prolonged Idling.

If it is necessary to allow the vehicle to idle for prolonged periods, ensure that the heating system air intake control is set to the

"Fresh" position, the blower is set to high speed operation and that the vehicle is standing in an open area.

• Load Carrying.

If it is necessary to carry long objects which do not permit the tailgate door to be fully closed, the side windows must remain

closed and the heating air intake control set to the "Fresh" position with the blower running at the highest speed setting.

To ensure correct operation of the heater system, the air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen must not be obstructed by

snow leaves etc.

Driving your vehicle

Before entering vehicle

• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tyres.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid

should be checked on a regular basis,

with the exact interval depending on the

fluid. Further details are provided in sec-

tion 7, “Maintenance”.

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position.

• Release the parking brake and make

sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-

iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING

All passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section

3 for more information on their

proper use.

WARNING

Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for people,

especially children, before putting a

car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Driving under

the influence of alcohol or

drugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.

Drunk driving is the number one

contributor to the highway death

toll each year. Even a small amount

of alcohol will affect your reflexes,

perceptions and judgment. Driving

whilst under the influence of drugs

is as dangerous or more dangerous

than driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have a

serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs,

don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-

er who has been drinking or taking

drugs. Choose a designated driver

or call a cab.

WARNING

When you intend to park or stop the

vehicle with the engine on, be care-

ful not to depress the accelerator

pedal for a long period of time. It

may overheat the engine or exhaust

system and cause fire.

Driving your vehicle

Illuminated ignition switch

(if equipped)

Whenever a front door is opened, the

ignition switch will be illuminated for your

convenience, provided the ignition switch

is not in the ON position. The light will go

off immediately when the ignition switch

is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-

onds when the door is closed.

Ignition switch position

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect

against theft. The ignition key can be

removed only in the LOCK position.

When turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, push the key inward at

the ACC position and turn the key toward

the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-

trical accessories are operative.

✽

NOTICE

If difficulty is experienced turning the

ignition switch to the ACC position, turn

the key whilst turning the steering wheel

right and left to release the tension.

The warning lights can be checked

before the engine is started. This is the

normal running position after the engine

is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the

engine is not running to prevent battery

discharge.

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START

position to start the engine. The engine

will crank until you release the key; then

it returns to the ON position. The brake

warning light can be checked in this posi-

tion.

KEY POSITIONS

OED046001

OED046002

ACC

START

LOCK

Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine

✽

NOTICE - Full throttle resistor

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with a resis-

tor in the accelerator pedal, it prevents

you from driving at full throttle unin-

tentionally by making the driver require

increased effort to depress the accelera-

tor pedal. However, if you depress the

pedal more than approximately 80%,

the vehicle can be at full throttle and the

accelerator pedal will be easier to

depress. This is not a malfunction but a

normal condition.

WARNING - Ignition switch

• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC whilst the vehicle is

moving. This would result in loss

of directional control and braking

function, which could cause an

accident.

• The anti-theft steering column lock

is not a substitute for the parking

brake. Before leaving the driver’s

seat, always make sure the shift

lever is engaged in 1

gear for the

manual transaxle or P (Park) for

the automatic transaxle, set the

parking brake fully and shut the

engine off. Unexpected and sud-

den vehicle movement may occur

if these precautions are not taken.

(Continued)

• Never reach for the ignition switch,

or any other controls through the

steering wheel whilst the vehicle is

in motion. The presence of your

hand or arm in this area could

cause a loss of vehicle control, an

accident and serious bodily injury

or death.

• Do not place any movable objects

around the driver’s seat as they

may move whilst driving, interfere

with the driver and lead to an acci-

dent.

WARNING

Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski

boots,etc.) may interfere with your

ability to use the brake and acceler-

ator pedal, and the clutch (if

equipped).

Driving your vehicle

Starting the petrol engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and leave the shift

lever at Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal

and brake pedal depressed whilst

turning the ignition switch to the start

position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the

transaxle shift lever in P (Park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when

the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)

position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START and

hold it there until the engine starts (a

maximum of 10 seconds), then

release the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below

-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has

not been operated for several days, let

the engine warm up without depress-

ing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it

should be started without depressing

the accelerator.

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the

engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated

before starting the engine and then have

to be warmed up before starting to drive.

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and leave the shift

lever at Neutral. Keep the clutch pedal

and brake pedal depressed whilst

turning the ignition switch to the start

position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the

transaxle shift lever in P(park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the

shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.

CAUTION

If the engine stalls whilst you are in

motion, do not attempt to move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position. If

traffic and road conditions permit,

you may put the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position whilst the vehicle

is still moving and turn the ignition

switch to the START position in an

attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION

Do not engage the starter for more

than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls

or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds

before re-engaging the starter.

Improper use of the starter may

damage it.

Driving your vehicle

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to pre-heat the engine. Then the

glow indicator light will illuminate.

4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn

the ignition switch to the START posi-

tion and hold it there until the engine

starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),

then release the key.

✽

NOTICE

If the engine does not start within 10

seconds after the preheating is complet-

ed, turn the ignition switch once more to

the LOCK position for 10 seconds, and

then to the ON position, in order to pre-

heat again.

Starting and stopping the engine for tur-

bocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine

immediately after starting.

If the engine is cold, idle for several

seconds before sufficient lubrication is

ensured in the turbocharger unit.

2. After high speed or extended driving,

requiring a heavy engine load, idle the

engine about 1 minute before turning it

off.

This idle time will allow the tur-

bocharger to cool prior to shutting the

engine off.

W-60

Glow indicator light

CAUTION

Do not turn the engine off immedi-

ately after it has been subjected to

a heavy load. Doing so may cause

severe damage to the engine or tur-

bocharger unit.

Driving your vehicle

Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP

button

Whenever the front door is opened, the

ENGINE START/STOP button will illumi-

nate for your convenience. The light will

go off after about 30 seconds when the

door is closed. It will also go off immedi-

ately when the theft-alarm system is

armed.

ENGINE START/STOP button

position

OFF

• With manual transaxle

To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-

tion) or vehicle power (ON position), stop

the vehicle then press the ENGINE

START/STOP button.

• With automatic transaxle

To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-

tion) or vehicle power (ON position),

press the ENGINE START/STOP button

with the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-

tion. When you press the ENGINE

START/STOP button without the shift

lever in the P (Park) position, the

ENGINE START/STOP button will not

change to the OFF position but to the

ACC position.

Also, the steering wheel locks when the

ENGINE START/STOP button is in the

OFF position to protect you against theft.

It locks when the door is opened.

If the steering wheel is not locked prop-

erly when you open the driver's door, the

warning chime will sound. Try locking the

steering wheel again. If the problem is

not solved, have it checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

In addition, if the ENGINE START/STOP

button is in the OFF position after the dri-

ver's door is opened, the steering wheel

will not lock and the warning chime will

sound. In such a situation, close the door.

Then the steering wheel will lock and the

warning chime will stop.

✽

NOTICE

If the steering wheel doesn't unlock

properly, the ENGINE START/STOP

button will not work. Press the ENGINE

START/STOP button whilst turning the

steering wheel right and left to release

the tension.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

OYN059001R

Not illuminated

Driving your vehicle

ACC(Accessory)

• With manual transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button

when the button is in the OFF position

without depressing the clutch pedal.

• With automatic transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button

whilst it is in the OFF position without

depressing the brake pedal.

The steering wheel unlocks and electri-

cal accessories are operational.

If the ENGINE START/STOP button is in

the ACC position for more than 1 hour,

the button turns off automatically to pre-

vent battery discharge.

• With manual transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button

when the button is in the ACC position

without depressing the clutch pedal.

• With automatic transaxle

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button

whilst it is in the ACC position without

depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked

before the engine is started. Do not leave

the ENGINE START/STOP button in the

ON position for a long time. The battery

may discharge, because the engine is

not running.

Orange indicator

Blue indicator

CAUTION

You are able to turn off the engine

(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),

only when the vehicle is not in

motion. In an emergency situation

whilst the vehicle is in motion, you

are able to turn the engine off and

to the ACC position by pressing the

ENGINE START/STOP button for

more than 2 seconds or 3 times

successively within 3 seconds. If

the vehicle is still moving, you can

restart the engine without depressing

the brake pedal by pressing the

ENGINE START/STOP button with the

shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

Driving your vehicle

105

START/RUN

• With manual transaxle

To start the engine, depress the clutch

pedal and brake pedal, then press the

ENGINE START/STOP with the shift

lever in the Neutral position.

• With automatic transaxle

To start the engine, depress the brake

pedal and press the ENGINE START/

STOP button with the shift lever in the P

(Park) or the N (Neutral) position. For

your safety, start the engine with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position.

✽

NOTICE

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP

button without depressing the clutch

pedal for manual transaxle vehicles or

without depressing the brake pedal for

automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine

will not start and the ENGINE START/

STOP button changes as follow:

OFF

➔

ACC

➔

OFF or ACC

✽

NOTICE

If you leave the ENGINE START/ STOP

button in the ACC or ON position for a

long time, the battery will discharge.

WARNING

• Never press the ENGINE START/

STOP button whilst the vehicle is

in motion. This would result in

loss of directional control and

braking function, which could

cause an accident.

• The anti-theft steering column

lock is not a substitute for the

parking brake. Before leaving the

driver's seat, always make sure

the shift lever is engaged in P

(Park), set the parking brake fully

and shut the engine off.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement may occur if these

precautions are not taken.

(Continued)

• Never reach for the ENGINE

START/STOP button or any other

controls through the steering

wheel whilst the vehicle is in

motion. The presence of your

hand or arm in the area could

cause loss of vehicle control, an

accident and serious bodily

injury or death.

• Do not place any movable objects

around the driver's seat as they

may move whilst driving, inter-

fere with the driver and lead to an

accident.

Not illuminated

511

Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine

✽

NOTICE - Full throttle resistor

(if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with a resis-

tor in the accelerator pedal, it prevents

you from driving at full throttle unin-

tentionally by making the driver require

increased effort to depress the accelera-

tor pedal. However, if you depress the

pedal more than approximately 80%,

the vehicle can be at full throttle and the

accelerator pedal will be easier to

depress. This is not a malfunction but a

normal condition.

Starting the petrol engine

(if equipped)

1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside

the vehicle.

2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly

applied

3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift the

transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch

pedal and brake pedal depressed

whilst starting the engine.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the

transaxle shift lever in P (Park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when

the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)

position.

4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP but-

ton.

5. In extremely cold weather (below -

18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has not

been operated for several days, let the

engine warm up without depressing

the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it

should be started without depressing the

accelerator.

Starting the diesel engine

(if equipped)

To start the diesel engine when the

engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated

before starting the engine and then have

to be warmed up before starting to drive.

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift the

transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch

pedal and brake pedal depressed

whilst pressing the ENGINE START/

STOP button to the START position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place the

transaxle shift lever in P (Park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the

shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski

boots,etc.) may interfere with your

ability to use the brake and acceler-

ator pedal, and the clutch (if

equipped).

Driving your vehicle

125

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP but-

ton whilst depressing the brake pedal.

4. Continue depressing the brake pedal

until the illuminated glow indicator

goes off. (approximately 5 seconds)

5. The engine starts running when the

glow indicator goes off.

✽

NOTICE

If the ENGINE START/STOP button is

pressed once more whilst the engine is

pre-heating, the engine may start.

Starting and stopping the engine for tur-

bocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine

immediately after starting.

If the engine is cold, idle for several

seconds before sufficient lubrication is

ensured in the turbocharger unit.

2. After high speed or extended driving,

requiring a heavy engine load, idle the

engine about 1 minute before turning it

off.

This idle time will allow the tur-

bocharger to cool prior to shutting the

engine off.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,

if it is far away from you, the engine

may not start.

• When the ENGINE START/STOP but-

ton is in the ACC position or above, if

any door is opened, the system checks

for the smart key. If the smart key is not

in the vehicle, the " " indicator will

blink on the instrument cluster. And if

all doors are closed, the chime will

sound for 5 seconds. The indicator or

warning will turn off whilst the vehicle is

moving. Always have the smart key

with you.

WARNING

The engine will start, only when the

smart key is in the vehicle.

Never allow children or any person

who is unfamiliar with the vehicle

touch the ENGINE START/STOP

button or related parts.

W-60

Glow indicator light

CAUTION

Do not turn the engine off immedi-

ately after it has been subjected to

a heavy load. Doing so may cause

severe damage to the engine or tur-

bocharger unit.

513

Driving your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

• If the battery is weak or the smart key

does not work correctly, you can start

the engine by pressing the ENGINE

START/STOP button directly with the

smart key.

• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you

can not start the engine normally.

Replace the fuse with a new one. If it

is not possible, you can start the

engine by pressing the ENGINE

START/STOP button for 10 seconds

whilst it is in the ACC position. The

engine can start without depressing

the brake pedal. But for your safety

always depress the brake pedal before

starting the engine.

CAUTION

Do not press the ENGINE START/

STOP button for more than 10 sec-

onds except when the stop lamp

fuse is blown.

OJC050030R

CAUTION

If the engine stalls whilst the vehi-

cle is in motion, do not attempt to

move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position. If the traffic and road con-

ditions permit, you may put the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position

whilst the vehicle is still moving

and press the ENGINE START/STOP

button in an attempt to restart the

engine.

Driving your vehicle

145

Your vehicle may be equipped with the

ISG system, which reduces fuel con-

sumption by automatically shutting down

the engine, when the vehicle is at a

standstill. (For example : red light, stop

sign and traffic jam)

The engine starts automatically as soon

as the starting conditions are met.

The ISG system is ON whenever the

engine is running.

✽

NOTICE

When the engine automatically starts by

the ISG system, some warning lights

(ABS, ESP, ESP OFF, EPS or Parking

brake warning light) may turn on for a

few seconds.

This happens because of low battery

voltage. It does not mean the system is

malfunctioning.

Auto stop

To stop the engine in idle stop mode

1. Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Shift into N (Neutral) position.

3. Release the clutch pedal.

The engine will stop and the green AUTO

STOP indicator ( ) on the instrument

cluster will illuminate. If your vehicle is

equipped with a supervision cluster, the

notice will illuminate on the LCD display.

✽

NOTICE

• You must reach a speed of at least 6

mph (10 km/h) since last idle stop.

• If you unfasten the seat belt or open

the driver’s door (engine bonnet) in

auto stop mode, the light on the ISG

OFF button will illuminate and ISG

system is deactivated. If your vehicle

is equipped with a supervision cluster,

the notice will illuminate on the LCD

display.

Turn the ignition switch to the START

position to start the engine manually.

ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OJC050032 OJC050038

515

Driving your vehicle

Auto start

To restart the engine from idle stop

mode

• Press the clutch pedal when the shift

lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

The engine will start and the green AUTO

STOP indicator ( ) on the instrument

cluster will go out.

The engine will also restart automati-

cally without the driver’s any actions

if the following occurs:

- The fan speed of manual climate con-

trol system is set above the 3rd position

when the air conditioning is on.

- The fan speed of automatic climate

control system is set above the 6th

position when the air conditioning is on.

- When a certain amount of time has

passed with the climate control system

on.

- When the defroster is on.

- The brake vaccum pressure is low.

- The battery charging status is low.

- The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5

km/h).

The green AUTO STOP indicator ( )

on the instrument cluster will blink for 5

seconds and the notice will illuminate on

the LCD display (if equipped).

OJC050033 OJC050037

Driving your vehicle

165

Condition of ISG system opera-

tion

The ISG system will operate under

the following condition:

- The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

- The driver’s door and bonnet are

closed.

- The brake vaccum pressure is ade-

quate.

- The battery is sufficiently charged.

- The outside temperature is between

2°C to 35°C.

- The engine coolant temperature is not

too low.

✽

NOTICE

• If the ISG system does not meet that

operation condition, the ISG system is

deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF

button will illuminate and the notice

will illuminate on the LCD display (if

equipped).

• If the light or notice comes on contin-

uously, please check the operation

condition.

ISG system deactivation

• If you want to deactivate the ISG sys-

tem, press the ISG OFF button. The

light on the ISG OFF button will illumi-

nate and the notice will illuminate on

the LCD display (if equipped).

• If you press the ISG OFF button again,

the system will be activated and the

light on the ISG OFF button will turn

off.

OJC050035ROJC050034

517

Driving your vehicle

ISG system malfunction

The system may not operate when:

- The ISG related sensors or system

error occurs.

The yellow AUTO STOP indicator ( )

on the instrument cluster will stay on

after blinking for 5 seconds and the light

on the ISG OFF button will illuminate. If

your vehicle is equipped with a supervi-

sion cluster, the notice will illuminate on

the LCD display.

✽

NOTICE

• If the ISG OFF button light is not

turned off by pressing the ISG OFF

button again or if the ISG system con-

tinuously does not work correctly,

please contact a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer as soon as possible.

• When the ISG OFF button light comes

on, it may stop illuminating after driv-

ing your vehicle at approximately 50

mph (80 km/h) for a maximum of two

hours and setting the fan speed con-

trol knob below the 2nd position. If

the ISG OFF button light continues to

be illuminated in spite of the proce-

dure, please contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer as soon as possi-

ble.

WARNING

When the engine is in Idle Stop

mode, it's possible to restart the

engine without the driver taking

any action.

Before leaving the car or doing any-

thing in the engine room area, stop

the engine by turning the ignition

switch to the LOCK(OFF) position

or removing the ignition key.

OJC050036

Driving your vehicle

185

Manual transaxle operation

The manual transaxle has 5 (6, if

equipped) forward gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift

knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized

in all forward gears so shifting to either a

higher or a lower gear is easily accom-

plished.

Depress the clutch pedal down fully

whilst shifting, then release it slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-

tion lock system, the engine will not start

when starting the engine without

depressing the clutch pedal.

The shift lever must return to the Neutral

position before shifting into R (Reverse).

The button (1) located immediately below

the shift knob must be pulled upward

whilst moving the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) position.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the

tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION

• When downshifting from 5th

(Fifth) gear to 4th (Fourth) gear,

caution should be taken not to

inadvertently move the shift lever

sideways in such a manner that

second gear is engaged. Such a

drastic downshift may cause the

engine speed to increase to the

point that the tachometer will

enter the red-zone. Such over-

revving of the engine may possi-

bly cause engine and transaxle

damage.

• Do not downshift more than 2

gears or downshift the gear when

the engine is running at high

speed (5,000 RPM or higher).

Such a downshifting may damage

the engine and the transaxle.

OED050001

The shift lever can be moved without pulling

the button (1).

The button (1) must be pulled up whilst

moving the shift lever.

* The actual shift lever in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

■ Type A

■ Type B

519

Driving your vehicle

• During cold weather, shifting may be

difficult until the transaxle lubricant has

warmed up. This is normal and not

harmful to the transaxle.

• If you've come to a complete stop and

it's hard to shift into 1st (First) or R

(Reverse), leave the shift lever at

Neutral position and release the clutch.

Depress the clutch pedal back down,

and then shift into 1st (First) or R

(Reverse) gear position.

Using the clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way

to the floor before shifting, then released

slowly. The clutch pedal should always be

fully released whilst driving. Do not rest

your foot on the clutch pedal whilst driv-

ing. This can cause unnecessary wear.

Do not partially engage the clutch to hold

the car on an incline. This causes unnec-

essary wear. Use the foot brake or park-

ing brake to hold the car on an incline. Do

not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and

repeatedly.

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traf-

fic or whilst driving up steep hills, down-

shift before the engine starts to labour.

Downshifting reduces the chance of

stalling and gives better acceleration

when you need to increase your speed

again. When the vehicle is travelling

down steep hills, downshifting helps

maintain safe speed and prolongs brake

life.

CAUTION

• To avoid premature clutch wear

and damage, do not drive with

your foot resting on the clutch

pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch

to hold the vehicle stopped on an

uphill grade, whilst waiting for a

traffic light, etc.

• Do not use the shift lever as a

handrest during driving, as this

can result in premature wear of

the transaxle shift forks.

WARNING

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always set the parking brake fully

and shut the engine off. Then

make sure the transaxle is shifted

into 1st (First) gear when the

vehicle is parked on a level or

uphill grade, and shifted into R

(Reverse) on a downhill grade.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement can occur if these pre-

cautions are not followed in the

order identified.

• If your vehicle has a manual

transaxle not equipped with a

ignition lock switch, it may move

and cause a serious accident

when starting the engine without

depressing the clutch pedal

whilst the parking brake is

released and the shift lever not in

the Neutral position.

Driving your vehicle

205

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and

coast down a hill. This is extremely

hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in

gear.

• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause

them to overheat and malfunction.

Instead, when you are driving down a

long hill, shift to a lower gear. When

you do this, engine braking will help

slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. This will help avoid over-revving

the engine, which can cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter cross

winds. This gives you much better con-

trol of your vehicle.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift into

R (Reverse). The transaxle can be

damaged if you do not. To shift into R

(Reverse), depress the clutch, move

the shift lever to Neutral, then shift to

the R (Reverse) position.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to re-enter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

521

Driving your vehicle

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 4 forward

speeds and one reverse speed. The indi-

vidual speeds are selected automatically,

depending on the position of the shift

lever.

✽

NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if

the battery has been disconnected, may

be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and the shifting sequence will

adjust after shifts are cycled a few times

by the TCM (Transaxle Control

Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control

Module).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

OYN059005R

Depress the brake pedal when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped shift lock system.

The shift lever can be moved freely.

Driving your vehicle

225

For smooth operation, depress the brake

pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a

forward or reverse gear.

Transaxle ranges

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into P (Park). This position locks

the transaxle and prevents the front

wheels from rotating.

WARNING - Automatic

transaxle

• Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for peo-

ple, especially children, before

shifting a car into D (Drive) or R

(Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position; then

set the parking brake fully and

shut the engine off. Unexpected

and sudden vehicle movement

can occur if these precautions

are not followed in the order iden-

tified.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not accelerate the

engine in R (Reverse) or any for-

ward gear position with the

brakes on.

• When stopped on an upgrade, do

not hold the vehicle with engine

power. Use the service brake or

the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P

(Park) into D (Drive), or R

(Reverse) when the engine is

above idle speed.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) whilst the

vehicle is in motion will cause the

drive wheels to lock which will

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) position

in place of the parking brake.

Always make sure the shift lever

is latched in the P (Park) position

and set the parking brake fully.

• Never leave a child unattended in

a vehicle.

CAUTION

The transaxle may be damaged if

you shift into P (Park) whilst the

vehicle is in motion.

523

Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transaxle are not locked.

The vehicle will roll freely even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving posi-

tion. The transaxle will automatically shift

through a 4-gear sequence, providing the

best fuel economy and power.

For extra power when passing another

vehicle or climbing grades, depress the

accelerator fully, at which time the

transaxle will automatically downshift to

the next lower gear.

✽

NOTICE

Always ensure vehicle is stationary, at a

complete stop, before selecting D

(Drive).

3 (Third Gear)

Move the shift lever to this position for

towing a trailer when climbing up a hill.

This position also provides engine brak-

ing when going down hills.

2 (Second Gear)

Use 2 (Second Gear) for more power

when climbing hills and for increased

braking when going down hills. This posi-

tion also helps reduce wheel spin on slip-

pery surfaces. When the shift lever is

placed in 2 (Second Gear), the transaxle

will automatically shift from first to sec-

ond gear.

1 (First Gear)

Move the shift lever to this position in

hard pulling situations and for climbing

steep grades.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transaxle if you shift into R

(Reverse) whilst the vehicle is in

motion, except as explained in

“Rocking the vehicle” in this sec-

tion.

CAUTION

Do not exceed the recommended

maximum speeds in 2 (Second

Gear) or 1 (First Gear). Operating

the vehicle at speeds above the

maximum recommended for 2

(Second Gear) or 1 (First Gear) may

cause excessive heat to develop

which could result in damage or

failure of the automatic transaxle.

Driving your vehicle

245

Shift lock system (if equipped)

For your safety, the automatic transaxle

has a shift lock system which prevents

shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the

brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly

depressed and released with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering

noise near the shift lever may be heard.

This is a normal condition.

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-

tion with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)

when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift into

R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the vehicle out of gear and

coast down a hill. This may be

extremely hazardous. Always leave the

vehicle in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can

cause them to overheat and malfunc-

tion. Instead, when you are driving

down a long hill, slow down and shift to

a lower gear. When you do this, engine

braking will help slow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may

not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do not

depend on placing the transaxle in P

(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the accelera-

tor pedal.

WARNING

Always fully depress the brake

pedal before and whilst shifting out

of the P (Park) position into anoth-

er position to avoid inadvertent

movement of the vehicle which

could injure persons in or around

the car.

525

Driving your vehicle

Moving up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start

To move up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift

the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the

appropriate gear depending on load

weight and steepness of the grade, and

release the parking brake. Depress the

accelerator pedal gradually whilst releas-

ing the service brakes.

When accelerating from a stop on a

steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-

dency to roll backwards. Shifting the

shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will

help prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward of backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

Driving your vehicle

265

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes

that adjust automatically through normal

usage.

In the event that the power-assisted

brakes lose power because of a stalled

engine or some other reason, you can

still stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than you nor-

mally would. The stopping distance, how-

ever, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the

reserve brake power is partially depleted

each time the brake pedal is applied. Do

not pump the brake pedal when the

power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when neces-

sary to maintain steering control on slip-

pery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate whilst the

vehicle is in motion, you can make an

emergency stop with the parking brake.

The stopping distance, however, will be

much greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This will

create abnormal high brake tem-

peratures, excessive brake lining

and pad wear, and increased

stopping distances.

• When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear and

avoid continuous application of

the brakes. Continuous brake

application will cause the brakes

to overheat and could result in a

temporary loss of braking per-

formance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-

cle’s ability to safely slow down;

the vehicle may also pull to one

side when the brakes are applied.

Applying the brakes lightly will

indicate whether they have been

affected in this way. Always test

your brakes in this fashion after

driving through deep water. To

dry the brakes, apply them lightly

whilst maintaining a safe forward

speed until brake performance

returns to normal.

WARNING - Parking brake

Applying the parking brake whilst

the vehicle is moving at normal

speeds can cause a sudden loss of

control of the vehicle. If you must

use the parking brake to stop the

vehicle, use great caution in apply-

ing the brake.

527

Driving your vehicle

Disc brakes wear indicator

Your vehicle has disc brakes.

When your brake pads are worn and new

pads are required, you will hear a high-

pitched warning sound from your front

brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You

may hear this sound come and go or it

may occur whenever you depress the

brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving con-

ditions or climates may cause a brake

squeal when you first apply (or lightly

apply) the brakes. This is normal and

does not indicate a problem with your

brakes.

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and then without pressing

the release button in, pull the parking

brake lever up as far as possible. In addi-

tion it is recommended that when parking

the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever

should be positioned in the appropriate

low gear for manual transaxle vehicles or

in the P (Park) position for automatic

transaxle vehicles.

WARNING - Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound

means your vehicle needs service.

If you ignore this audible warning,

you will eventually lose braking

performance, which could lead to a

serious accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

• Always replace brake pads as

complete front or rear axle sets.

CAUTION

Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessive brake

pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.

OYN059020/H

Driving your vehicle

285

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and pull up the parking

brake lever slightly. Secondly press the

release button (1) and lower the parking

brake lever (2) whilst pressing the button.

Check the brake warning light by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). This light will illuminate when the

parking brake is applied with the ignition

switch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake

is fully released and the brake warning

light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on

after the parking brake is released whilst

the engine is running, there may be a

malfunction in the brake system.

Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-

cle immediately. If that is not possible,

use extreme caution whilst operating the

vehicle and only continue to drive the

vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-

tion or repair shop.

WARNING

• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leaving

the vehicle, do not use the shift

lever instead of the parking

brake. Set the parking brake AND

make sure the shift lever is

securely positioned in 1st (First)

gear or R (Reverse) for manual

transaxle equipped vehicles and

in P (Park) for automatic

transaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-

miliar with the vehicle to touch

the parking brake. If the parking

brake is released unintentionally,

serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the vehicle

which can injure occupants or

pedestrians.

W-75

OYN059021R

529

Driving your vehicle

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

(if equipped)

The ABS continuously senses the speed

of the wheels. If the wheels are going to

lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-

lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the

wheels.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit

from your ABS in an emergency situa-

tion, do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to pump

your brakes. Depress your brake pedal

as hard as possible or as hard as the sit-

uation allows the ABS to control the force

being delivered to the brakes.

WARNING

ABS (or ESP) will not prevent acci-

dents due to improper or danger-

ous driving manoeuvres. Even

though vehicle control is improved

during emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance between

you and objects ahead. Vehicle

speeds should always be reduced

during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for vehicles

equipped with an anti-lock braking

system (or Electronic Stability

Program System) may be longer

than for those without it in the fol-

lowing road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle

should be driven at reduced

speeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.

• With tyre chains installed.

(Continued)

• On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surface

height.

The safety features of an ABS (or

ESP) equipped vehicle should not

be tested by high speed driving or

cornering. This could endanger the

safety of yourself or others.

Driving your vehicle

305

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the anti-lock brake system

is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,

your vehicle still requires sufficient

stopping distance. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.

The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from exces-

sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake system

may result in a longer stopping dis-

tance than for vehicles equipped with a

conventional brake system.

✽

NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the engine

may not run as smoothly and the ABS

warning light may turn on at the same

time. This happens because of low bat-

tery voltage. It does not mean your ABS

is malfunctioning.

• Do not pump your brakes!

• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION

• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problem

with the ABS. In this case, howev-

er, your regular brakes will work

normally.

• The ABS warning light will stay

on for approximately 3 seconds

after the ignition switch is ON.

During that time, the ABS will go

through self-diagnosis and the

light will go off if everything is

normal. If the light stays on, you

may have a problem with your

ABS. Contact a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer as soon as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and operate your brakes continu-

ously, the ABS will be active con-

tinuously and the ABS warning

light may illuminate. Pull your

vehicle over to a safe place and

stop the engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your

ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a prob-

lem with the ABS. Contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

531

Driving your vehicle

Electronic stability program (ESP)

(if equipped)

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

system is designed to stabilize the

vehicle during cornering manoeuvres.

ESP checks where you are steering and

where the vehicle is actually going.

ESP applies the brakes at individual

wheels and intervenes with the engine

management system to stabilize the

vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

system is an electronic system designed

to help the driver maintain vehicle control

under adverse conditions. It is not a

substitute for safe driving practices.

Factors including speed, road conditions

and driver steering input can all affect

whether ESP will be effective in

preventing a loss of control. It is still your

responsibility to drive and corner at

reasonable speed and to leave a

sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ESP is active.

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the Electronic Stability

Program System is functioning proper-

ly.

WARNING

Never drive too fast according to

the road conditions or too quickly

when cornering. Electronic stability

program (ESP) will not prevent acci-

dents. Excessive speed in turns,

abrupt manoeuvres and hydroplan-

ing on wet surfaces can still result

in serious accidents. Only a safe

and attentive driver can prevent

accidents by avoiding manoeuvres

that cause the vehicle to lose trac-

tion. Even with ESP installed,

always follow all the normal precau-

tions for driving - including driving

at safe speeds for the conditions.

OYN059008R

Driving your vehicle

325

ESP operation

ESP ON condition

• When the ignition is turned

ON, ESP and ESP OFF indi-

cator lights illuminate for

approximately 3 seconds,

then ESP is turned on.

• Press the ESP OFF button for

at least half a second after

turning the ignition ON to turn

ESP off. (ESP OFF indicator

will illuminate). To turn the

ESP on, press the ESP OFF

button (ESP OFF indicator

light will go off).

• When starting the engine,

you may hear a slight ticking

sound. This is the ESP per-

forming an automatic system

self-check and does not indi-

cate a problem.

When operating

When the ESP is in operation,

ESP indicator light blinks.

• When the Electronic Stability

Program is operating proper-

ly, you can feel a slight pulsa-

tion in the vehicle. This is only

the effect of brake control and

indicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mud

or slippery road, depressing

the accelerator pedal may not

cause the engine rpm (revo-

lutions per minute) to

increase.

ESP operation off

ESP OFF state

• To cancel ESP operation,

press the ESP OFF button

(ESP OFF indicator light illu-

minates).

• If the ignition switch is turned

to the LOCK position when

ESP is off, ESP remains off.

Upon restarting the engine,

the ESP will automatically

turn on again.

533

Driving your vehicle

Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the indicator light illuminates,

then goes off if the ESP system is oper-

ating normally.

The ESP indicator light blinks whenever

ESP is operating or illuminates when

ESP fails to operate.

ESP OFF indicator light comes on when

the ESP is turned off with the button.

✽

NOTICE

After reconnecting or recharging a dis-

charged battery, the ESP OFF indicator

may illuminate. In this case, turn the

steering wheel 360 degrees to the left

and 360 degrees to the right whilst the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

Then, restart the engine after the igni-

tion is off. If the ESP OFF indicator does

not turn off, have the system checked by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible.

ESP OFF usage

When driving

• ESP should be turned on for daily driv-

ing whenever possible.

• To turn ESP off whilst driving, press

the ESP OFF button whilst driving on a

flat road surface.

✽

NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESP is

turned off (ESP OFF light illuminat-

ed). If the ESP is left on, it may pre-

vent the vehicle speed from increas-

ing, and result in false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESP off does not affect

ABS or brake system operation.

■ ESP indicator light

■ ESP OFF indicator light

CAUTION

Driving with varying tyre or wheel

sizes may cause the ESP system to

malfunction. When replacing tyres,

make sure they are the same size as

your original tyres.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Program

system is only a driving aid; use

precautions for safe driving by

slowing down on curved, snowy, or

icy roads. Drive slowly and don’t

attempt to accelerate whenever the

ESP indicator light is blinking, or

when the road surface is slippery.

WARNING

Never press ESP OFF button whilst

ESP is operating (ESP indicator

light blinks).

If ESP is turned off whilst ESP is

operating, the vehicle may slip out

of control.

Driving your vehicle

345

Hill-start assist control (HAC)

(if equipped)

Hill-start Assist Control is a function for

your convenience. The main intention is

to prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards whilst driving uphill on an inclined

surface. HAC holds the braking pressure

built up by the driver whilst stopping for 2

seconds (manual transaxle) or 0.8 sec-

onds (automatic transaxle) after releas-

ing the brake pedal.

During the pressure-hold period, the

driver has enough time to depress the

accelerator pedal to drive off.

The braking pressure is reduced as soon

as the system detects the driver’s inten-

tion to drive.

✽

NOTICE

• The HAC does not operate when the

transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)

or N (Neutral) position.

• The HAC activates even though the

ESP is off but it does not activate

when the ESP has malfunctioned.

Good braking practices

• Check to be sure the parking brake is

not engaged and that the parking

brake indicator light is out before driv-

ing away.

• Driving through water may get the

brakes wet. They can also get wet

when the vehicle is washed. Wet

brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle

will not stop as quickly if the brakes are

wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle

to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking operation

returns to normal, to keep the vehicle

under control at all times. If the braking

operation does not return to normal,

stop as soon as it is safe to do so and

call a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for

assistance.

• Don't coast down hills with the vehicle

out of gear. This is extremely haz-

ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all

times, use the brakes to slow down,

then shift to a lower gear so that

engine braking will help you maintain a

safe speed.

WARNING

The HAC is usually activated only

for 2 seconds (manual transaxle) or

0.8 seconds (automatic transaxle).

The driver should be careful not to

roll backward causing an accident

with an object or person behind.

535

Driving your vehicle

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting

your foot on the brake pedal whilst driv-

ing can be dangerous because the

brakes might overheat and lose their

effectiveness. It also increases the

wear of the brake components.

• If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving,

apply the brakes gently and keep the

vehicle pointed straight ahead whilst

you slow down. When you are moving

slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,

pull off the road and stop in a safe

place.

• If your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic transaxle, don't let your vehi-

cle creep forward. To avoid creeping

forward, keep your foot firmly on the

brake pedal when the vehicle is

stopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and

place the shift lever in P (automatic

transaxle) or in first or reverse gear

(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is

facing downhill, turn the front wheels

toward the kerb to help keep the vehi-

cle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing

uphill, turn the front wheels away from

the kerb to help keep the vehicle from

rolling. If there is no kerb or if it is

required by other conditions to keep

the vehicle from rolling, block the

wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged posi-

tion. This is most likely to happen when

there is an accumulation of snow or ice

around or near the rear brakes or if the

brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the

parking brake may freeze, apply it only

temporarily whilst you put the shift

lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in

first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)

and block the rear wheels so the vehi-

cle cannot roll. Then release the park-

ing brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on an upgrade

with the accelerator pedal. This can

cause the transaxle to overheat.

Always use the brake pedal or parking

brake.

Driving your vehicle

365

The cruise control system allows you to

program the vehicle to maintain a con-

stant speed without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function

above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

✽

NOTICE

During normal cruise control operation,

when the SET switch is activated or

reactivated after applying the brakes,

the cruise control will energize after

approximately 3 seconds. This delay is

normal.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster illuminated)

the cruise control can be

switched on accidentally. Keep

the cruise control system off

(CRUISE indicator light OFF)

when the cruise control is not in

use, to avoid inadvertently set-

ting a speed.

• Use the cruise control system

only when driving on open high-

ways in good weather.

(Continued)

• Do not use the cruise control

when it may not be safe to keep

the vehicle at a constant speed,

for instance, driving in heavy or

varying traffic, or on slippery

(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or

winding roads or over 6% up-hill

or down-hill roads.

• Pay particular attention to the

driving conditions whenever

using the cruise control system.

CAUTION

During cruise-speed driving with a

manual transaxle vehicle, do not

shift into neutral without depress-

ing the clutch pedal, since the

engine will be overrevved. If this

happens, depress the clutch pedal

or release the cruise control ON-

OFF switch.

537

Driving your vehicle

Cruise control switch

O: Cancels cruise control operation.

: Turns cruise control system on or

off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise

control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control

speed.

To set cruise control speed:

1. Press the cruise ON-OFF button on

the steering wheel, to turn the system

on. The CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which

must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

✽

NOTICE - Manual transaxle

(if equipped)

For manual transaxle vehicles, you

should depress the brake pedal at least

once to set the cruise control after start-

ing the engine.

3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and

release it at the desired speed. The

SET indicator light in the instrument

cluster will illuminate. Release the

accelerator pedal at the same time.

The desired speed will automatically

be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow

down or speed up slightly whilst going

downhill.

OJC050014OJC05009 OJC050010

Driving your vehicle

385

To increase cruise control set

speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold

it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release

the lever at the speed you want.

• Move the lever up (to RES+) and

release it immediately. The cruising

speed will increase by 1.2 mph (2.0

km/h) or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

you move the lever up (to RES+) in this

manner.

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever down (to SET-) and

hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow

down. Release the lever at the speed

you want to maintain.

• Move the lever down (to SET-) and

release it immediately. The cruising

speed will decrease by 1.2 mph (2.0

km/h) or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time

you move the lever down (to SET-) in

this manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the

cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when

the cruise control is on, depress the

accelerator pedal. Increased speed will

not interfere with cruise control operation

or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot

off the accelerator pedal.

OJC050014OJC050013

539

Driving your vehicle

To cancel cruise control, do one

of the following:

• Depress the brake pedal.

• Depress the clutch pedal if equpped

with a manual transaxle.

• Shift into N (Neutral) if equpped with

an automatic transaxle.

• Press the CANCEL switch located on

the steering wheel.

• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 12 mph (20

km/h).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Each of these actions will cancel cruise

control operation (the SET indicator light

in the instrument cluster will go off), but it

will not turn the system off. If you wish to

resume cruise control operation, move

up the lever (to RES+) located on your

steering wheel. You will return to your

previously preset speed.

To resume cruising speed at

more than approximately 25 mph

(40 km/h):

If any method other than the cruise ON-

OFF switch was used to cancel cruising

speed and the system is still activated,

the most recent set speed will automati-

cally resume when you move the lever up

(to RES+).

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle

speed has dropped below approximately

25 mph (40 km/h).

OJC050012 OJC050013

Driving your vehicle

405

To turn cruise control off, do one

of the following:

• Press the cruise ON-OFF button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions cancel cruise con-

trol operation. If you want to resume

cruise control operation, repeat the steps

provided in “To set cruise control speed”

on the previous page.

541

Driving your vehicle

You can set the speed limit when you do

not want to drive over a specific speed.

If you drive over the preset speed limit,

the warning system operates (set speed

limit will blink and chime will sound) until

the vehicle speed returns within the

speed limit.

✽

NOTICE

Whilst speed limit control is in opera-

tion, the cruise control system cannot be

activated.

Speed limit control switch

O: Cancels set speed limit.

: Turns speed limit control system on

or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases speed limit

control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit con-

trol speed.

To set speed limit :

1. Press the speed limit ON-OFF button

on the steering wheel, to turn the sys-

tem on. The speed limit indicator light

in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OJC050011OJC05009

Driving your vehicle

425

2. Move the lever down (to SET-).

3. Move the lever up (to RES+) or down

(to SET-), and release it at the desired

speed. Move the lever up (to RES+) or

down (to SET-) and hold it. The speed

will increase or decrease by 3 mph (5

km/h).

The set speed limit will display on the

instrument cluster.

If you would like to drive over the preset

speed limit when you depress the accel-

erator pedal less than approximately

50%, the vehicle speed will maintain

within speed limit.

However if you depress the accelerator

pedal more than approximately 70%, you

can drive over the speed limit. Then the

set speed limit will blink and chime will

sound until you return the vehicle speed

within the speed limit.

To turn off the speed limit con-

trol, do one of the following:

• Press the speed limit ON-OFF switch

once again.

• Press the cruise ON-OFF switch (If you

press cruise switch, the cruise system

will turn on)

If you press the CANCEL switch once,

the set speed limit will cancel, but it will

not turn the system off. If you wish to

reset the speed limit, move the lever up

(to RES+) or down (to SET-) to the

desired dpeed.

OJC050016OJC050015

543

Driving your vehicle

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends

mainly on your style of driving, where you

drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many

miles (kilometers) you can get from a

gallon (litre) of fuel. To operate your vehi-

cle as economically as possible, use the

following driving suggestions to help

save money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts

or full-throttle shifts and maintain a

steady cruising speed. Don't race

between stoplights. Try to adjust your

speed to the traffic so you don't have to

change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid

heavy traffic whenever possible.

Always maintain a safe distance from

other vehicles so you can avoid unnec-

essary braking. This also reduces

brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster

you drive, the more fuel your vehicle

uses. Driving at a moderate speed,

especially on the highway, is one of the

most effective ways to reduce fuel con-

sumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.

This can increase fuel consumption

and also increase wear on these com-

ponents. In addition, driving with your

foot resting on the brake pedal may

cause the brakes to overheat, which

reduces their effectiveness and may

lead to more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tyres. Keep them

inflated to the recommended pressure.

Incorrect inflation, either too much or

too little, results in unnecessary tyre

wear. Check the tyre pressures at least

once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned

correctly. Improper alignment can

result from hitting kerbs or driving too

fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-

ment causes faster tyre wear and may

also result in other problems as well as

greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condition.

For better fuel economy and reduced

maintenance costs, maintain your vehi-

cle in accordance with the mainte-

nance schedule. If you drive your vehi-

cle in severe conditions, more frequent

maintenance is required.

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum

service, your vehicle should be kept

clean and free of corrosive materials. It

is especially important that mud, dirt,

ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate

on the underside of the vehicle. This

extra weight can result in increased

fuel consumption and also contribute

to corrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary

weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces

fuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than

necessary. If you are waiting (and not

in traffic), turn off your engine and

restart only when you're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

Driving your vehicle

445

• Remember, your vehicle does not

require extended warm-up. After the

engine has started, allow the engine to

run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-

ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold

weather, however, give your engine a

slightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "labour" or "over-rev" the engine.

Labouring is driving too slowly in too

high a gear resulting engine bucking. If

this happens, shift to a lower gear.

Over-revving is racing the engine

beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-

ed by shifting at the recommended

speeds.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.

The air conditioning system is operat-

ed by engine power so your fuel econ-

omy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can

reduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds

and headwinds. To help offset some of

this loss, slow down when driving in

these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-

dition is important both for economy and

safety. Therefore, have a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer perform scheduled

inspections and maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off dur-

ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coast

down hills or anytime the vehicle is

in motion. The power steering and

power brakes will not function

properly without the engine run-

ning. Instead, keep the engine on

and downshift to an appropriate

gear for engine braking effect. In

addition, turning off the ignition

whilst driving could engage the

steering wheel lock resulting in

loss of vehicle steering which

could cause serious injury or

death.

545

Driving your vehicle

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are

encountered such as water, snow, ice,

mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow

these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.

• Avoid sudden braking or steering.

• When braking with non-ABS brakes

pump the brake pedal with a light up-

and-down motion until the vehicle is

stopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use

second gear. Accelerate slowly to

avoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or

other non-slip material under the drive

wheels to provide traction when stalled

in ice, snow, or mud.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is

defined as a Multi Purpose Vehicle

(MPV). MPV’s have higher ground clear-

ance and a narrower track to make them

capable of performing in a wide variety of

road applications. Specific design char-

acteristics give them a higher centre of

gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advan-

tage of the higher ground clearance is a

better view of the road, which allows you

to anticipate problems. They are not

designed for cornering at the same

speeds as conventional passenger vehi-

cles. Due to this risk, driver and passen-

gers are strongly recommended to buck-

le their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted person is more likely to die than

a person wearing a seat belt. There are

steps that a driver can make to reduce

the risk of a rollover. If at all possible,

avoid sharp turns or abrupt manoeuvres,

do not load your roof rack with heavy

cargo, and never modify your vehicle in

any way.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - ABS

Do not pump the brake pedal on a

vehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - Downshifting

Downshifting with an automatic

transaxle, whilst driving on slippery

surfaces can cause an accident.

The sudden change in tyre speed

could cause the tyres to skid. Be

careful when downshifting on slip-

pery surfaces.

Driving your vehicle

465

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to

free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn

the steering wheel right and left to clear

the area around your front wheels. Then,

shift back and forth between 1st (First)

and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped

with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)

and any forward gear in vehicles

equipped with an automatic transaxle. Do

not race the engine, and spin the wheels

as little as possible. If you are still stuck

after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled

out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine over-

heating and possible damage to the

transaxle.

CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause

engine over-heating, transaxle dam-

age or failure, and tyre damage.

WARNING

Your vehicle is equipped with tyres

designed to provide safe ride and

handling capability. Do not use a

size and type of tyre and wheel that

is different from the one that is

originally installed on your vehicle.

It can affect the safety and perform-

ance of your vehicle, which could

lead to steering failure or rollover

and serious injury. When replacing

the tyres, be sure to equip all four

tyres with the tyre and wheel of the

same size, type, tread, brand and

load-carrying capacity. If you never-

theless decide to equip your vehi-

cle with any tyre/wheel combina-

tion not recommended by

HYUNDAI for off road driving, you

should not use these tyres for high-

way driving.

WARNING - Rollover

As with other Multi Purpose Vehicle

(MPV), failure to operate this vehi-

cle correctly may result in loss of

control, an accident or vehicle

rollover.

• Utility vehicles have a significant-

ly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles.

• Specific design characteristics

(higher ground clearance, nar-

rower track, etc.) give this vehicle

a higher centre of gravity than

ordinary vehicles.

• A MPV is not designed for cor-

nering at the same speeds as

conventional vehicles.

• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt

manoeuvres.

• In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more like-

ly to die than a person wearing a

seat belt. Make sure everyone in

the vehicle is properly buckled

up.

547

Driving your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

The ESP system (if equipped) should be

turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-

ners, especially when roads are wet.

Ideally, corners should always be taken

under gentle acceleration. If you follow

these suggestions, tyre wear will be held

to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more

hazards than driving in the daylight, here

are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as it

may be more difficult to see at night,

especially in areas where there may

not be any street lights.

WARNING - Spinning tyres

Do not spin the wheels, especially

at speeds more than 56 km/h (35

mph). Spinning the wheels at high

speeds when the vehicle is station-

ary could cause a tyre to overheat

which could result in tyre damage

that may injure bystanders.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward of backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

OUN056051/H OCM050200R

Driving your vehicle

485

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare

from other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-

erly aimed on vehicles not equipped

with the automatic headlight aiming

feature. Dirty or improperly aimed

headlights will make it much more diffi-

cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlights

of oncoming vehicles. You could be

temporarily blinded, and it will take

several seconds for your eyes to read-

just to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-

pared for the slick pavement. Here are a

few things to consider when driving in the

rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distance

needed to stop your vehicle, so slow

down.

• Keep your windscreen wiping equip-

ment in good shape. Replace your

windscreen wiper blades when they

show signs of streaking or missing

areas on the windscreen.

• If your tyres are not in good condition,

making a quick stop on wet pavement

can cause a skid and possibly lead to

an accident. Be sure your tyres are in

good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-

ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles

can affect your brakes. If you must go

through puddles, try to drive through

them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gotten

your brakes wet, apply them lightly

whilst driving until normal braking

operation returns.

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no high-

er than the bottom of the wheel hub.

Drive through any water slowly. Allow

adequate stopping distance because

brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them several

times whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.

1JBB3303/H

549

Driving your vehicle

Highway driving

Tyres

Adjust the tyre inflation pressures to

specification. Low tyre inflation pressures

will result in overheating and possible

failure of the tyres.

Avoid using worn or damaged tyres

which may result in reduced traction or

tyre failure.

✽

NOTICE

Never exceed the maximum tyre infla-

tion pressure shown on the tyres.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuel

than urban motoring. Do not forget to

check both engine coolant and engine

oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may result

in overheating of the engine.

WARNING

• Underinflated or overinflated

tyres can cause poor handling,

loss of vehicle control, and sud-

den tyre failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

Always check tyres for proper

inflation before driving. For prop-

er tyre pressures, refer to “Tyres

and wheels” in section 8.

• Driving on tyres with no or insuf-

ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-

out tyres can result in loss of

vehicle control, collisions, injury,

and even death. Worn-out tyres

should be replaced as soon as

possible and should never be

used for driving. Always check

the tyre tread before driving your

car. For further information and

tread limits, refer to “Tyres and

wheels” in section 7.

ONF028001R

Driving your vehicle

505

The onset of winter conditions subject

motor vehicles to greater operating

demands. Therefore, the following sug-

gestions will assist in maintaining peak

performance and reliability during these

periods:

Snowy or icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may

be necessary to use snow tyres or to

install tyre chains on your tyres. If snow

tyres are needed, it is necessary to

select tyres equivalent in size and type of

the originally equipped tyres. Failure to

do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your car. Furthermore,

speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden

brake applications, and sharp turns are

potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking

to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-

cations on snowy or icy roads may cause

skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-

cient distance between the vehicle in

operation in front and your vehicle. Also,

apply the brake gently. It should be noted

that installing tyre chains on the tyre will

provide a greater driving force, but will

not prevent side skids.

✽

NOTICE

Tyre chains are not legal in all countries.

Check the country laws before fitting

tyre chains.

Snow tyres

If you mount snow tyres on your vehicle,

make sure they are radial tyres of the

same size and load range as the original

tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four

wheels to balance your vehicle’s han-

dling in all weather conditions. Keep in

mind that the traction provided by snow

tyres on dry roads may not be as high as

your vehicle's originally equipped tyres.

You should drive cautiously even when

the roads are clear. Check with the tyre

dealer for maximum speed recommen-

dations.

Do not install studded tyres without first

checking local, state and municipal regu-

lations for possible restrictions against

their use.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tyre size

Snow tyres should be equivalent in

size and type to the vehicle's stan-

dard tyres. Otherwise, the safety

and handling of your vehicle may

be adversely affected.

1JBB3305

551

Driving your vehicle

Tyre chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are

thinner, they can be damaged by mount-

ing some types of snow chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tyres is rec-

ommended instead of snow chains. Do

not mount tyre chains on vehicles

equipped with aluminum wheels; snow

chains may cause damage to the wheels.

If snow chains must be used, use wire-

type chains with a thickness of less than

15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to your vehicle

caused by improper snow chain use is

not covered by your vehicle manufactur-

ers warranty.

Install tyre chains only on the front tyres.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manu-

facturer's instructions and mount them as

tightly as you can. Drive slowly with

chains installed. If you hear the chains

contacting the body or chassis, stop and

tighten them. If they still make contact,

slow down until it stops. Remove the

chains as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

CAUTION

• Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type for your

tyres. Incorrect snow chains can

cause damage to the vehicle body

and suspension and may not be

covered by your vehicle manufac-

turer warranty. Also, the snow

chain connecting hooks may be

damaged from contacting vehicle

components causing the snow

chains to come loose from the

tyre. Make sure the snow chains

are SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installation

for proper mounting after driving

approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5

to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.

Retighten or remount the chains

if they are loose.

• If your vehicle has 205/50R17 size

tyres with 6.5Jx17 wheel, don’t use

tyre chain; they can damage your

vehicle (wheel, suspension and

body).

WARNING

- Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning flashers and place

a triangular emergency warning

device behind the vehicle if avail-

able. Always place the vehicle in P

(Park), apply the parking brake and

turn off the engine before installing

snow chains.

OED050200

Driving your vehicle

525

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality

ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling

system. It is the only type of coolant that

should be used because it helps prevent

corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-

cates the water pump and prevents

freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish

your coolant in accordance with the

maintenance schedule. Before winter,

have your coolant tested to assure that

its freezing point is sufficient for the tem-

peratures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the

battery system. Visually inspect the bat-

tery and cables as described in section

7. The level of charge in your battery can

be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer or a service station.

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended that

a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be

used during cold weather. See section 8

for recommendations. If you aren't sure

what weight oil you should use, consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs and replace

them if necessary. Also check all ignition

wiring and components to be sure they

are not cracked, worn or damaged in any

way.

WARNING - Tyre chains

• The use of chains may adversely

affect vehicle handling.

• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)

or the chain manufacturer’s rec-

ommended speed limit, whichev-

er is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,

holes, sharp turns, and other

road hazards, which may cause

the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-

wheel braking.

CAUTION

• Chains that are the wrong size or

improperly installed can damage

your vehicle's brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Stop driving and retighten the

chains any time you hear them

hitting the vehicle.

553

Driving your vehicle

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into

the key opening. If a lock is covered with

ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing

fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is

frozen internally, you may be able to thaw

it out by using a heated key. Handle the

heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer

system from freezing, add an approved

window washer anti-freeze solution in

accordance with instructions on the con-

tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is

available from a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer and most auto parts outlets. Do

not use engine coolant or other types of

anti-freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged position.

This is most likely to happen when there

is an accumulation of snow or ice around

or near the rear brakes or if the brakes

are wet. If there is a risk the parking

brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-

ily whilst you put the shift lever in P (auto-

matic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear

(manual transaxle) and block the rear

wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then

release the parking brake.

Do not park a vehicle on a public road

without the parking brake applied.

Don't let ice and snow accumu-

late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice

can build up under the fenders and inter-

fere with the steering. When driving in

severe winter conditions where this may

happen, you should periodically check

underneath the car to be sure the move-

ment of the front wheels and the steering

components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weath-

er, you should carry appropriate emer-

gency equipment. Some of the items you

may want to carry include tyre chains,

tow straps or chains, flashlight, emer-

gency flares, sand, shovel, jumper

cables, window scraper, gloves, ground

cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.

Driving your vehicle

545

If you are considering towing with your

vehicle, you should first check with your

Local Laws to determine their legal

requirements.

Since laws vary the requirements for tow-

ing trailers, cars, or other types of vehi-

cles or apparatus may differ. Ask a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer for further

details before towing.

✽

NOTICE - For Europe

• The technically permissible maximum

load on the rear axle(s) may be

exceeded by not more than 15% and

the technically permissible maximum

laden mass of the vehicle may be

exceeded by not more than 10% or

220.4 lbs (100kg), whichever value is

lower. In this case, do not exceed 62.1

mph (100 km/h) for vehicle of catego-

ry M1 or 49.7 mph (80 km/h) for vehi-

cle of category N1.

• When a vehicle of category M1 is tow-

ing a trailer, the additional load

imposed at the trailer coupling device

may cause the tyre maximum load

ratings to be exceeded, but not by

more than 15%. In this case, do not

exceed 62.1 mph (100 km/h) and

increase the tyre inflation pressure by

at least 0.2 bar.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify

what the vehicle trailering capacity is for

your vehicle, you should read the infor-

mation in “Weight of the trailer” that

appears later in this section.

Remember that trailering is different than

just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling,

durability, and fuel economy. Successful,

safe trailering requires correct equip-

ment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested,

important trailering tips and safety rules.

Many of these are important for your

safety and that of your passengers.

Please read this section carefully before

you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the

engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and

tyres are forced to work harder against

the load of the added weight. The engine

is required to operate at relatively higher

speeds and under greater loads. This

additional burden generates extra heat.

The trailer also considerably adds wind

resistance, increasing pulling require-

ments.

TRAILER TOWING (FOR EUROPE)

WARNING - Towing a trailer

If you don't use the correct equip-

ment and drive improperly, you can

lose control when you pull a trailer.

For example, if the trailer is too

heavy, the brakes may not work

well - or even at all. You and your

passengers could be seriously or

fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if

you have followed all the steps in

this section.

WARNING - Weight limits

Before towing, make sure the total

trailer weight, gross combination

weight, gross vehicle weight, gross

axle weight and trailer nose weight

are all within the limits.

CAUTION

Pulling a trailer improperly can

damage your vehicle and result in

costly repairs not covered by your

warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,

follow the advice in this section.

555

Driving your vehicle

Towbars

It's important to have the correct towbar

equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks

going by, and rough roads are a few rea-

sons why you’ll need the right towbar.

Here are some rules to follow:

• Do you have to make any holes in the

body of your vehicle when you install a

trailer towbar? If you do, then be sure

to seal the holes later when you

remove the towbar.

If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon

monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can

get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and

water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are not

intended for towbars. Do not attach

rental towbars or other bumper-type

towbars. Use only a frame-mounted

towbar that does not attach to the

bumper.

• HYUNDAI trailer towbar accessory is

available at a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

OYN059101/OYN059102

Driving your vehicle

565

Safety cables

You should always attach cables

between your vehicle and your trailer.

Cross the safety cables under the nose

of the trailer so that the nose will not drop

to the road if it becomes separated from

the towbar.

Instructions about safety cables may be

provided by the towbar manufacturer or

by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the

manufacturer’s recommendation for

attaching safety cables. Always leave just

enough slack so you can turn with your

trailer. And, never allow safety cables to

drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking

system, make sure it conforms to local

regulations and that it is properly

installed and operating correctly.

If your trailer weight exceeds the maxi-

mum allowed weight without trailer

brakes, then the trailer will also require its

own brakes as well. Be sure to read and

follow the instructions for the trailer

brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust

and maintain them properly.

• Don’t tap into or modify your vehicle's

brake system.

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain

amount of experience. Before setting out

for the open road, you must get to know

your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the

feel of handling and braking with the

added weight of the trailer. And always

keep in mind that the vehicle you are

driving is now a good deal longer and not

nearly so responsive as your vehicle is

by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer towbar

and platform, safety cables, electrical

connector(s), lights, tyres and mirror

adjustment. If the trailer has electric

brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-

ing and then apply the trailer brake con-

troller by hand to be sure the brakes are

working. This lets you check your electri-

cal connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be

sure that the load is secure, and that the

lights and trailer brakes are still working.

WARNING - Trailer brakes

Do not use a trailer with its own

brakes unless you are absolutely

certain that you have properly set

up the brake system. This is not a

task for amateurs. Use an experi-

enced, competent trailer shop for

this work.

557

Driving your vehicle

Following distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-

cle ahead as you would when driving

your vehicle without a trailer. This can

help you avoid situations that require

heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up

ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,

because of the increased vehicle length,

you’ll need to go much farther beyond the

passed vehicle before you can return to

your lane.

Backing up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel

with one hand. Then, to move the trailer

to the left, just move your hand to the left.

To move the trailer to the right, move your

hand to the right. Always back up slowly

and, if possible, have someone guide

you.

Making turns

When you’re turning with a trailer, make

wider turns than normal. Do this so your

trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, kerbs,

road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid

jerky or sudden manoeuvres. Signal well

in advance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has

to have a different turn signal flasher and

extra wiring. The green arrows on your

instrument panel will flash whenever you

signal a turn or lane change. Properly

connected, the trailer lights will also flash

to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,

change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green arrows

on your instrument panel will flash for

turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are

burned out. Thus, you may think drivers

behind you are seeing your signals

when, in fact, they are not. It’s important

to check occasionally to be sure the trail-

er bulbs are still working. You must also

check the lights every time you discon-

nect and then reconnect the wires.

Do not connect a trailer lighting system

directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.

Use only an approved trailer wiring har-

ness.

A HYUNDAI authorised repairer can

assist you in installing the wiring har-

ness.

Driving on grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear

before you start down a long or steep

downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you

might have to use your brakes so much

that they would get hot and no longer

operate efficiently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and

reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70

km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine

and transaxle overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than the max-

imum trailer weight without trailer brakes

and you have an automatic transaxle,

you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-

ing a trailer.

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when

towing a trailer will minimise heat build up

and extend the life of your transaxle.

WARNING

Failure to use an approved trailer

wiring harness could result in dam-

age to the vehicle electrical system

and/or personal injury.

Driving your vehicle

585

Parking on hills

Generally, if you have a trailer attached to

your vehicle, you should not park your

vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously

or fatally injured, and both your vehicle

and the trailer can be damaged if unex-

pectedly roll down hill.

However, if you ever have to park your

trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.

Turn the steering wheel in the direction

of the kerb (left if headed down hill,

right if headed up hill).

2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,

place the car in Neutral. If the vehicle

has an automatic transaxle, place the

car in P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake and shut off the

vehicle.

4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels

on the down hill side of the wheels.

5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift

to neutral, release the parking brake

and slowly release the brakes until the

trailer chocks absorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-

ing brake and shift the vehicle to R

(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P

(Park) for automatic transaxle.

7. Shut off the vehicle and release the

vehicle brakes but leave the parking

brake set.

CAUTION

• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) pay

close attention to the engine

coolant temperature gauge to

ensure the engine does not over-

heat. If the coolant temperature

red warning light illuminates, pull

over and stop as soon as it is safe

to do so, and allow the engine to

idle until it cools down. You may

proceed once the engine has

cooled sufficiently.

• You must decide the driving

speed depending on trailer

weight and uphill grade to reduce

the possibility of engine and

transaxle overheating.

WARNING - Parking on a

hill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with a

trailer attached could cause seri-

ous injury or death, should the trail-

er break loose.

WARNING - Parking brake

It can be dangerous to get out of

your vehicle if the parking brake is

not firmly set.

If you have left the engine running,

the vehicle can move suddenly. You

or others could be seriously or

fatally injured.

559

Driving your vehicle

When you are ready to leave after park-

ing on a hill

1. With the manual transaxle in N

(Neutral) or automatic transaxle in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold the

brake pedal down whilst you:

• Start your engine;

• Shift into gear; and

• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from the

brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of

the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and

store the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer towing

Your vehicle will need service more often

when you regularly pull a trailer.

Important items to pay particular atten-

tion to include engine oil, automatic

transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling

system fluid. Brake condition is another

important item to frequently check. Each

item is covered in this manual, and the

Index will help you find them quickly. If

you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review

these sections before you start your trip.

Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer

and towbar. Follow the maintenance

schedule that accompanied your trailer

and check it periodically. Preferably, con-

duct the check at the start of each day’s

driving. Most importantly, all towbar nuts

and bolts should be tight.

CAUTION

• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occur

in hot days or during uphill driv-

ing. If the coolant gauge indicates

over-heating, switch off the air

conditioner and stop the vehicle

in a safe area to cool down the

engine.

• When towing, check the transaxle

fluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equipped

with an air conditioner, you

should install a condenser fan to

improve engine performance

when towing a trailer.

Driving your vehicle

605

If you do decide to pull a trailer

Here are some important points if you

decide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control. You can

ask a towbar dealer about sway con-

trol.

• Do not do any towing with your car dur-

ing its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in

order to allow the engine to properly

run-in. Failure to heed this caution may

result in serious engine or transaxle

damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-

sult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for

further information on additional

requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-

ate speed (less than 60 mph/100

km/h). If your vehicle is a commercial

vehicle, drive less than 50 mph (80

km/h).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed

45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing

speed limit, whichever is lower.

• The chart contains important consider-

ations that have to do with weight:

M/T : Manual transaxle

A/T : Automatic transaxle

Engine

Item

Petrol Engine Diesel Engine

1.4

Engine

1.6

Engine

1.4

Engine

M/T A/T

Maximum

trailer weight

Ibs. (kg)

Without brake

System

1213

(550)

1213

(550)

1213

(550)

1213

(550)

With brake

System

2866

(1300)

2866

(1300)

2425

(1100)

2866

(1300)

Maximum permissible static

vertical load on the coupling

device

Ibs. (kg)

165

(75)

Recommended distance

from rear wheel centre to

coupling point

inch (mm)

30.7

(780)

561

Driving your vehicle

Weight of the trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be? It

should never weigh more than the maxi-

mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But

even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your

trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road

grades, outside temperature and how

often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer

are all important. The ideal trailer weight

can also depend on any special equip-

ment that you have on your vehicle.

Weight of the trailer nose

The nose weight of any trailer is an

important weight to measure because it

affects the total gross vehicle weight

(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight

includes the kerb weight of the vehicle,

any cargo you may carry in it, and the

people who will be riding in the vehicle.

And if you will tow a trailer, you must add

the nose weight to the GVW because

your vehicle will also be carrying that

weight.

The trailer nose should weigh a maxi-

mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer

weight, within the limits of the maximum

permissible trailer nose weight. After

you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-

er and then the nose, separately, to see

if the weights are proper. If they aren’t,

you may be able to correct them simply

by moving some items around in the trail-

er.

C190E01JM

Nose Weight Total Trailer Weight

WARNING - Trailer

• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in the

front. The front should be loaded

with approximately 60% of the

total trailer load; the rear should

be loaded with approximately 40%

of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximum

weight limits of the trailer or trail-

er towing equipment. Improper

loading can result in damage to

your vehicle and/or personal

injury. Check weights and loading

at a commercial scale or highway

patrol office equipped with scales.

• An improperly loaded trailer can

cause loss of vehicle control.

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight

Gross Vehicle Weight

Driving your vehicle

625

This section will guide you in the proper

loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to

keep your loaded vehicle weight within its

design rating capability, with or without a

trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will

provide maximum return of the vehicle

design performance. Before loading your

vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-

lowing terms for determining your vehi-

cle's weight ratings, with or without a

trailer, from the vehicle's specifications

and the certification label:

Vehicle kerb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including

fuel, driver and all standard equipment.

Payload

This is the weight of passengers, lug-

gage and any optional equipment

installed.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each

axle (front and rear) - including vehicle

kerb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight

that can be carried by a single axle (front

or rear). These numbers are shown on

the compliance label.

The total load on each axle must never

exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the maximum allowed weight of

the vehicle, contents, passengers and

optional equipment.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of

the fully loaded vehicle (including all

options, equipment, passengers and

cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-

tification label located on the driver's (or

front passenger's) door sill.

Overloading

VEHICLE WEIGHT

WARNING - Vehicle weight

The gross axle weight rating

(GAWR) and the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-

cle are on the certification label

attached to the driver's (or front

passenger’s) door. Exceeding these

ratings can cause an accident or

vehicle damage. You can calculate

the weight of your load by weighing

the items (and people) before put-

ting them in the vehicle. Be careful

not to overload your vehicle.

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency whilst driving / 6-3

If the engine will not start / 6-4

Emergency starting / 6-5

If the engine overheats / 6-8

If you have a flat tyre (with spare tyre) / 6-9

If you have a flat tyre (with TyreMobilityKit) / 6-17

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) / 6-22

Towing / 6-27

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a

warning to other drivers to exercise

extreme caution when approaching,

overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency

repairs are being made or when the vehi-

cle is stopped near the edge of a road-

way.

Press the flasher switch with the ignition

switch in any position. The flasher switch

is located in the centre console switch

panel. All turn signal lights will flash

simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates

whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the

hazard flasher is on.

• The hazard waning flasher should

always be on whilst the vehicle is being

towed.

OJC060001

What to do in an emergency

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILST DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a crossroad

or crossing

• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, set the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position and then push the

vehicle to a safe place.

• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle

not equipped with a ignition lock

switch, the vehicle can move forward

by shifting to the 2nd (Second) or 3 rd

(Third) gear and then turning the

starter without depressing the clutch

pedal.

If you have a flat tyre whilst driv-

ing

If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

and let the vehicle slow down whilst

driving straight ahead. Do not apply the

brakes immediately or attempt to pull

off the road as this may cause a loss of

control. When the vehicle has slowed

down to such a speed that it is safe to

do so, brake carefully and pull off the

road. Drive off the road as far as possi-

ble and park on a firm level ground. If

you are on a divided highway, do not

park in the median area between the

two traffic lanes.

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on

your emergency hazard flashers, set

the parking brake and put the transaxle

in P (automatic transaxle) or Reverse

(manual transaxle).

3.Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the

side of the vehicle that is away from

traffic.

4.When changing a flat tyre, follow the

instruction provided later in this sec-

tion.

If engine stalls whilst driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer or seek

other qualified assistance.

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine doesn't turn over or

turns over slowly

1. If your vehicle has an automatic

transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N

(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-

gency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be

sure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate the

starter, the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be

sure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start

it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

If engine turns over normally but

does not start

1. Check the fuel level.

2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK/

OFF position, check all connectors at

the ignition coils and spark plugs.

Reconnect any that may be discon-

nected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-

partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer or seek

other qualified assistance.

WARNING

If the engine refuses to start, no

attempt should be made to push or

tow start the vehicle. Vehicles with

automatic transaxle or fuel injec-

tion will not be able to be started in

this manner since no drive is trans-

mitted through the automatic

transaxle whilst the engine is not

running, and in the case of fuel

injected derivatives, the fuel pump

will not operate under tow start

conditions. In addition, if the vehi-

cle is equipped with an exhaust cat-

alyst, damage to the catalyst may

result if the vehicle is tow started.

What to do in an emergency

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order and

disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done

incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to

yourself or damage to your vehicle or

battery, follow the jump starting proce-

dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-

mend that you have a competent techni-

cian or towing service jump start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Use only a 12-volt jumper system.

You can damage a 12-volt starting

motor, ignition system, and other

electrical parts beyond repair by

use of a 24-volt power supply (either

two 12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery

• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-

duces hydrogen gas which may

explode if exposed to flame or

sparks.

If these instructions are not fol-

lowed exactly, serious personal

injury and damage to the vehicle

may occur! If you are not sure

how to follow this procedure,

seek qualified assistance.

Automobile batteries contain sul-

furic acid. This is poisonous and

highly corrosive. When jump

starting, wear protective glasses

and be careful not to get acid on

yourself, your clothing or on the

vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged battery

is frozen or if the electrolyte level

is low; the battery may rupture or

explode.

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the elec-

trolyte level of the battery as this

may cause the battery to rupture or

explode causing serious injury.

1VQA4001

Discharged

battery

Jumper Cables

Booster

battery

(-)

(+)

(-)

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting procedure

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not allow the vehicles come

in contact.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical

loads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact

sequence shown in the illustration.

First connect one end of a jumper

cable to the positive terminal of the

discharged battery (1), then connect

the other end to the positive terminal

on the booster battery (2).

5. Proceed to connect one end of the

other jumper cable to the negative ter-

minal of the booster battery (3), then

the other end to a solid, stationary,

metallic point (for example, the engine

lifting bracket) away from the battery

(4). Do not connect it to or near any

part that moves when the engine is

cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-

tact anything except the correct bat-

tery terminals or the correct ground.

Do not lean over the battery when

making connections.

6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and let it run at 2,000

rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-

cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent, you should have your vehi-

cle checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

CAUTION - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable

from the negative terminal of the

booster battery to the negative ter-

minal of the discharged battery.

This can cause the discharged bat-

tery to overheat and crack, releas-

ing battery acid.

CAUTION - AGM battery

(if equipped)

• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) bat-

teries are maintenance-free and

should only be serviced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer. For

charging your AGM battery, use

only fully automatic battery

chargers that are specially devel-

oped for AGM batteries.

• When replacing the AGM battery,

use only the HYUNDAI genuine

battery for the ISG system.

• Do not open or remove the cap on

top of the battery. This may cause

leaks of internal electrolyte that

could result in severe injury.

• If the AGM battery is reconnected

or replaced, ISG function will not

operate immediately.

If you want to use the ISG func-

tion, the battery sensor needs to

be calibrated for approximately 4

hours with the ignition off.

What to do in an emergency

Push-starting

Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle

should not be push-started because it

might damage the emission control sys-

tem.

Vehicles equipped with automatic

transaxle cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for

jump-starting.

WARNING

Never tow a vehicle to start it

because the sudden surge forward

when the engine starts could cause

a collision with the tow vehicle.

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates over-

heating, you will experience a loss of

power, or hear loud pinging or knocking,

the engine is probably too hot. If this hap-

pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic

transaxle) or Neutral (manual

transaxle) and set the parking brake. If

the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under

the vehicle or steam is coming out

from the bonnet, stop the engine. Do

not open the bonnet until the coolant

has stopped running or the steaming

has stopped. If there is no visible loss

of engine coolant and no steam, leave

the engine running and check to be

sure the engine cooling fan is operat-

ing. If the fan is not running, turn the

engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive

belt is missing. If it is not missing,

check to see that it is tight. If the drive

belt seems to be satisfactory, check for

coolant leaking from the radiator,

hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air

conditioning had been in use, it is nor-

mal for cold water to be draining from

it when you stop).

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken

or engine coolant is leaking out, stop

the engine immediately and call the

nearest a HYUNDAI authorised repair-

er for assistance.

6. If the cause of the overheating cannot

be found, wait until the engine temper-

ature has returned to normal. Then, if

coolant has been lost, carefully add

coolant to the reservoir to bring the

fluid level in the reservoir up to the

base of the radiator fill opening. Fill the

coolant expansion tank to the halfway

mark. To ensure the correct water to

coolant mix is obtained after top up,

testing by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer is required.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for

further signs of overheating. If over-

heating happens again, call a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer for

assistance.

WARNING

Whilst the engine is running, keep

hair, hands and clothing away from

moving parts such as the fan and

drive belts to prevent injury.

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. This can

allow coolant to be blown out of the

opening and cause serious burns.

CAUTION

Serious loss of coolant indicates

there is a leak in the cooling system

and this should be checked as soon

as possible by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH SPARE TYRE, IF EQUIPPED)

Jack and tools

The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut

wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment.

Pull up the luggage box cover to

reach this equipment.

(1) Jack handle

(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency

tyre changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”

whilst the vehicle is in motion, store it

properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce

the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING - Changing

tyres

• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a public

road or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-

pletely off the road and onto

the shoulder before trying to

change a tyre. The jack should

be used on firm level ground.

If you cannot find a firm level

place off the road, call a tow-

ing service company for

assistance.

• Be sure to use the correct

front and rear jacking posi-

tions on the vehicle; never

use the bumpers or any other

part of the vehicle for jack

support.

(Continued)

OYN069002

What to do in an emergency

106

Removing and storing the spare

tyre

Turn the tyre hold-down wing bolt

counterclockwise.

Store the tyre in the reverse order of

removal.

To prevent the spare tyre and tools

from “rattling” whilst the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

Changing tyres

1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into R

(Reverse) for manual transaxle or

P (Park) for automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

(Continued)

• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing serious

injury or death. No person

should place any portion of

their body under a vehicle that

is supported only by a jack;

use vehicle support stands.

• Do not start or run the engine

whilst the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone remain in

the vehicle whilst it is on the

jack.

• Make sure any children pres-

ent are in a secure place away

from the road and from the

vehicle to be raised with the

jack.

OED066025 OED066033/H

611

What to do in an emergency

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tyre

from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of

wheel that is diagonally opposite

the jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn each, but do

not remove any nut until the tyre

has been raised off the ground.

WARNING -

Changing a tyre

• To prevent vehicle movement

whilst changing a tyre, always

set the parking brake fully,

and always block the wheel

diagonally opposite the wheel

being changed.

• We recommend that the

wheels of the vehicle be

chocked, and that no person

remain in a vehicle that is

being jacked.

OJC060019 OED066026

What to do in an emergency

126

7. Place the jack at the front or rear

jacking position closest to the tyre

you are changing. Place the jack

at the designated locations under

the frame. The jacking positions

are plates welded to the frame

with two tabs and a raised dot to

index with the jack.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tyre just clears the

ground. This measurement is

approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).

Before removing the wheel lug

nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-

ble and that there is no chance for

movement or slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts and

remove them with your fingers.

Slide the wheel off the studs and

lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To

put the wheel on the hub, pick up

the spare tyre, line up the holes

with the studs and slide the wheel

onto them. If this is difficult, tip the

wheel slightly and get the top hole

in the wheel lined up with the top

stud. Then jiggle the wheel back

and forth until the wheel can be

slid over the other studs.

WARNING - Jack location

To reduce the possibility of

injury, be sure to use only the

jack provided with the vehicle

and in the correct jack position;

never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

OJC060020 OJC060021

613

What to do in an emergency

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on

the studs, put the wheel nuts on

the studs and tighten them finger

tight. Jiggle the tyre to be sure it

is completely seated, then tight-

en the nuts as much as possible

with your fingers again.

11. Lower the vehicle to the ground

by turning the wheel nut wrench

counterclockwise.

Then position the wrench as shown

in the drawing and tighten the wheel

nuts. Be sure the socket is seated

completely over the nut. Do not stand

on the wrench handle or use an

extension pipe over the wrench han-

dle. Go around the wheel tightening

every nut following the numerical

sequence shown in the image until

they are all tight. Then double-check

each nut for tightness. After changing

wheels, have a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer tighten the wheel nuts to

their proper torque as soon as possi-

ble.

WARNING

• Wheels may have sharp

edges. Handle them carefully

to avoid possible severe

injury.

• Before putting the wheel into

place, be sure that there is

nothing on the hub or wheel

(such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)

that interferes with the wheel

from fitting solidly against the

hub. If there is, remove it. If

the contact of the mounting

surface between the wheel

and hub is not good, the

wheel nuts could come loose

and cause the loss of a wheel.

Loss of a wheel may result in

loss of control of the vehicle.

This may cause serious injury

or death.

OED066028

What to do in an emergency

146

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:

65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)

If you have a tyre gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the cor-

rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust

it until it is correct. Always reinstall

the valve cap after checking or

adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is

not replaced, air may leak from the

tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy

another and install it as soon as pos-

sible.

After you have changed wheels,

always secure the flat tyre in its place

and return the jack and tools to their

proper storage locations.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,

wheel lug nut wrench and spare tyre

from rattling whilst the vehicle is in

motion, store them properly.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the wheel studs and nuts.

Make certain during wheel

removal that the same nuts that

were removed are reinstalled -

or, if replaced, that nuts with

metric threads and the same

chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric

thread nut on a metric stud or

vice-versa will not secure the

wheel to the hub properly and

will damage the stud so that it

must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not

have metric threads. Be sure to

use extreme care in checking

for thread style before installing

aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.

If in doubt, consult a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

WARNING - Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they

may lose their ability to retain

the wheel. This could lead to the

loss of the wheel and a collision

resulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequate

spare tyre pressure

Check the inflation pressures

as soon as possible after

installing the spare tyre. Adjust

it to the specified pressure, if

necessary. Refer to “Tyres and

wheels” in section 8.

615

What to do in an emergency

Important - use of compact spare

tyre (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a com-

pact spare tyre. This compact spare

tyre takes up less space than a reg-

ular-size tyre. This tyre is smaller

than a conventional tyre and is

designed for temporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-

ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽

NOTICE

Check the inflation pressure after

installing the spare tyre. Adjust it to

the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tyre,

observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a

higher speed could damage the

tyre.

• Ensure that you drive slowly

enough to avoid all hazards. Any

road hazard, such as a pothole or

debris, could seriously damage the

compact spare.

• Any continuous road use of this

tyre could result in tyre failure, loss

of vehicle control, and possible

personal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-

mum load rating or the load-carry-

ing capacity shown on the sidewall

of the compact spare tyre.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The

compact spare tyre diameter is

smaller than the diameter of a con-

ventional tyre and reduces the

ground clearance approximately 1

inch (25 mm), which could result in

damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION

• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is in

use. The compact spare

should be replaced by the

proper conventional tyre and

rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle

is not recommended with

more than one compact spare

tyre in use at the same time.

WARNING

The compact spare tyre is for

emergency use only. Do not

operate your vehicle on this

compact spare at the speed

over 80 km/h (50 mph). The

original tyre should be repaired

or replaced as soon as possible

to avoid failure of the spare

possibly leading to personal

injury or death.

What to do in an emergency

166

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash whilst the com-

pact spare tyre is installed.

• Do not use tyre chains on the com-

pact spare tyre. Because of the

smaller size, a tyre chain will not fit

properly. This could damage the

vehicle and result in loss of the

chain.

• The compact spare tyre should not

be installed on the front axle if the

vehicle must be driven in snow or

on ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tyre

on any other vehicle because this

tyre has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tyre’s tread life

is shorter than a regular tyre.

Inspect your compact spare tyre

regularly and replace worn com-

pact spare tyres with the same size

and design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• The compact spare tyre should not

be used on any other wheels, nor

should standard tyres, snow tyres,

wheel covers or trim rings be used

with the compact spare wheel. If

such use is attempted, damage to

these items or other car compo-

nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tyre at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer whilst the com-

pact spare tyre is installed.

617

What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH TYREMOBILITYKIT, IF EQUIPPED)

Please read the instructions before

using the TyreMobilityKit.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

Introduction

With the TyreMobilityKit you stay mobile

even after experiencing a tyre puncture.

The system of compressor and sealing

compound effectively and comfortably

seals most punctures in a passenger

car tyre caused by nails or similar

objects and reinflates the tyre. After you

ensure that the tyre is properly sealed

you can drive cautiously on the tyre (up

to 120 miles (200 km)) at a max. speed

of 50 mph (80 km/h) in order to reach a

vehicle or tyre dealer to have the tyre

replaced.

It is possible that some tyres, especial-

ly with larger punctures or damage to

the sidewall, cannot be sealed com-

pletely. Air pressure loss in the tyre may

adversely affect tyre performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

manoeuvres, especially if the vehicle is

heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The TyreMobilityKit is not designed or

intended as a permanent tyre repair

method and is to be used for one tyre

only. This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the punc-

ture simply and reliably. Read the sec-

tion "Notes on the safe use of the

TyreMobilityKit".

OYN069010 OYN069018

WARNING

Do not use the TyreMobilityKit if

a tyre is severely damaged by

driving run flat or with insuffi-

cient air pressure. Only punc-

tured areas located within the

tread region of the tyre can be

sealed using the TyreMobilityKit.

Damage to the sidewall must not

be repaired due to safety rea-

sons.

What to do in an emergency

186

0. Speed restriction label

1. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

3. Connectors and cable for the

power outlet direct connection

4. Holder for the sealant bottle

5. Compressor

6. On/off switch

7. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tyre inflation pressure

8. Button for reducing tyre inflation

pressure

9. Hose to connect compressor and

sealant bottle or compressor and

wheel

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

WARNING

Before using the TyreMobilityKit,

follow the instructions on the

sealant bottle.

Remove the label with the speed

restriction from the sealant bottle

and apply it to the steering wheel.

Please note the expiry date on the

sealant bottle.

Components of the TyreMobilityKit

OAM060015L

619

What to do in an emergency

Using the TyreMobilityKit

1. Filling the sealant

Strictly follow the specified sequence,

otherwise the sealant may escape

under high pressure.

1) Shake the sealant bottle.

2) Screw connection hose 9 onto the

connector of the sealant bottle.

3) Ensure that button 8 on the com-

pressor is not pressed.

4) Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the defective wheel and

screw filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle onto the valve.

5) Insert the sealant bottle into the

housing of the compressor so that

the bottle is upright.

6) Ensure that the compressor is

switched off, position 0.

7) Connect between compressor

and the vehicle power outlet using

the cable and connectors.

8) With the ignition switched on:

Switch on the compressor and let it

run for approximately 3 minutes to fill

the sealant. The inflation pressure of

the tyre after filling is unimportant.

9) Switch off the compressor.

10) Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and

from the tyre valve.

Return the TyreMobilityKit to its stor-

age location in the vehicle.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide poisoning

and suffocation is possible if the

engine is left running in a poorly

ventilated or unventilated loca-

tion (such as inside a building).

OYN069018

What to do in an emergency

206

Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approximately 2

miles (3 km) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tyre.

Producing the tyre inflation pres-

sure

1) After driving approximately 2 miles

(3 km), stop at a suitable location.

2) Connect connection hose 9 of the

compressor directly to the tyre

valve.

3) Connect between compressor

and the vehicle power outlet using

the cable and connectors.

4) Adjust the tyre inflation pressure

to 32 psi (2.2 bar). With the igni-

tion switched on, proceed as fol-

lows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure: Switch on the compressor,

position I. To check the current

inflation pressure setting, briefly

switch off the compressor.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure: Press the button 8 on the

compressor.

WARNING

Do not let the compressor run for

more than 10 minutes, otherwise

the device will overheat and may

be damaged.

WARNING

The tyre inflation pressure must

be at least 32 psi (2.2 bar). If it is

not, do not continue driving.

Call for road side service or

towing.

CAUTION

Do not exceed a speed of 35

mph (60 km/h). If possible, do

not fall below a speed of 12 mph

(20 km/h).

Whilst driving, if you experience

any unusual vibration, ride dis-

turbance or noise, reduce your

speed and drive with caution

until you can safely pull off of

the side of the road.

Call for road side service or tow-

ing.

CAUTION

If the inflation pressure is not

maintained, drive the vehicle a

second time, refer to

Distributing the sealant. Then

repeat steps 1 to 4.

Use of the TyreMobilityKit may

be ineffectual for tyre damage

larger than approximately 0.16

in (4 mm).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI A/S centre, or a work-

shop that works according to

HYUNDAI repair procedures

with correspondingly trained

personnel if the tyre cannot be

made roadworthy with the

TyreMobilityKit.

621

What to do in an emergency

Notes on the safe use of the

TyreMobilityKit

• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the

TyreMobilityKit away from moving

traffic. Place your warning triangle

in a prominent place to make pass-

ing vehicles aware of your location.

• To be sure your vehicle won't

move, even when you're on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the TyreMobilityKit for

sealing/inflation passenger car

tyres. Do not use on motorcycles,

bicycles or any other type of tyres.

• Do not remove any foreign objects-

such as nails or screws -that have

penetrated the tyre.

• Before using the TyreMobilityKit,

read the precautionary advice

printed on the sealant bottle!

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the TyreMobilityKit

unattended whilst it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 min. at a time

or it may overheat.

• Do not use the TyreMobilityKit if the

ambient temperature is below -30°C

(-22°F).

• Do not use the sealing compound

after its expiration date which can

be found on the label of the bottle.

• Keep away from children.

Technical Data

System voltage: DC 12 V

Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V

Amperage rating: max. 15 A

Suitable for use at temperatures:

-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)

Max. working pressure:

87 psi (6 bar)

Size

Compressor: 6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.

(170 x 150 x 60 mm)

Sealant bottle: 3.3 x 3.0 ø in.

(85 x 77 ø mm)

Compressor weight:

1.8 lbs (0.8 kg)

Sealant volume:

12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)

❈ Sealing compound and spare

parts can be obtained and

replaced at an authorized vehicle

or tyre dealer. Empty sealing com-

pound bottles may be disposed of

at home. Liquid residue from the

sealing compound should be dis-

posed of by your vehicle or tyre

dealer or in accordance with local

waste disposal regulations.

What to do in an emergency

226

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)

(1) Low tyre pressure telltale /

TPMS malfunction indicator

(2) Low tyre pressure position tell-

tale (Shown on the LCD display)

Each tyre, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tyres of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tyre inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tyre inflation pressure for

those tyres.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a

tyre pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre

pressure telltale when one or more

of your tyres is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low

tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tyres as

soon as possible, and inflate them to

the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-

nificantly under-inflated tyre causes

the tyre to overheat and can lead to

tyre failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-

dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tyre mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tyre pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tyre pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with

the low tyre pressure telltale. When

the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximate-

ly 1 minute and then remain continu-

ously illuminated. This sequence will

continue upon subsequent vehicle

start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists. When the TPMS malfunction

indicator remains illuminated after

blinking for approximately 1 minute,

the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tyre pressure as intend-

ed. TPMS malfunctions may occur

for a variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alter-

nate tyres or wheels on the vehicle

that prevent the TPMS from function-

ing properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after

replacing one or more tyres or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

the replacement or alternate tyres

and wheels allow the TPMS to con-

tinue to function properly.

OJC060013R

623

What to do in an emergency

✽

NOTICE

Take your vehicle to the nearest

HYUNDAI authorised repairer and

have the system checked if any of

the below happens:

1.The low tyre pressure telltale/

TPMS malfunction indicator and

low tyre pressure position telltale

do not illuminate.

2.The TPMS malfunction indicator

remains illuminated after blinking

for approximately 1 minute.

3.The Low tyre pressure position

telltale remains illuminated.

Low tyre pressure tell-

tale

Low tyre pressure posi-

tion telltale

When the tyre pressure monitoring

system warning indicators are illumi-

nated, one or more of your tyres is

significantly under-inflated. The low

tyre pressure position telltale light

will indicate which tyre is significant-

ly under-inflated by illuminating the

corresponding position light.

If either telltale illuminates, immedi-

ately reduce your speed, avoid hard

cornering and anticipate increased

stopping distances. You should stop

and check your tyres as soon as pos-

sible. Inflate the tyres to the proper

pressure as indicated on the vehi-

cle’s placard or tyre inflation pres-

sure label located on the driver’s side

centre pillar outer panel. If you can-

not reach a service station or if the

tyre cannot hold the newly added air,

replace the low pressure tyre with a

spare tyre.

Then the TPMS malfunction indicator

may blink for approximately 1 minute

and then remain continuously illumi-

nated and the low tyre pressure posi-

tion telltale will remain on after

restarting and about 20 minutes of

continuous driving before you have

the low pressure tyre repaired and

replaced on the vehicle.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

low tyre pressure telltale may

illuminate if the tyre pressure

was adjusted to the recom-

mended tyre inflation pressure

in warm weather. It does not

mean your TPMS is malfunction-

ing because the decreased tem-

perature leads to a proportional

lowering of tyre pressure.

When you drive your vehicle

from a warm area to a cold area

or from a cold area to a warm

area, or the outside temperature

is greatly higher or lower, you

should check the tyre inflation

pressure and adjust the tyres to

the recommended tyre inflation

pressure.

What to do in an emergency

246

TPMS (Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System)

malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicator will

illuminate after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System. If the system is

able to correctly detect an underinfla-

tion warning at the same time as sys-

tem failure then the TPMS malfunc-

tion indicator remains illuminated

after blinking for approximately 1

minute and the low tyre pressure

position telltale will illuminate e.g. if

Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS mal-

function indicator remains illuminated

after blinking for approximately 1

minute, but if the Front Right, Rear

Left, or Rear Right tyre is under-inflat-

ed, the low tyre pressure position tell-

tales may illuminate together with the

TPMS malfunction indicator.

Have the system checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer as

soon as possible to determine the

cause of the problem.

WARNING - Low pressure

damage

Significantly low tyre pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking

distances.

Continued driving on low pres-

sure tyres can cause the tyres

to overheat and fail.

CAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may blink for approximate-

ly 1 minute and then remain

continuously illuminated if the

vehicle is moving around elec-

tric power supply cables or

radios transmitter such as at

police stations, government

and public offices, broadcast-

ing stations, military installa-

tions, airports, or transmitting

towers, etc. This can interfere

with normal operation of the

Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indica-

tor may blink for approximate-

ly 1 minute and then remain

continuously illuminated if

snow chains are used or some

separate electronic devices

such as notebook computer,

mobile charger, remote starter

or navigation etc., are used in

the vehicle. This can interfere

with normal operation of the

Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS).

625

What to do in an emergency

Changing a tyre with TPMS

If you have a flat tyre, the low Tyre

Pressure and Position telltales will

come on. Have the flat tyre repaired

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer

as soon as possible or replace the

flat tyre with the spare tyre.

Each wheel is equipped with a tyre

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tyre behind the valve stem. You must

use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-

ommended that you always have

your tyres serviced by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

After you replace the low pressure

tyre with the spare tyre, the TPMS

malfunction indicator may blink for

approximately 1 minute and then

remain continuously illuminated

because the TPMS sensor mounted

on the spare wheel is not initiated.

Once the low pressure tyre is rein-

flated to the recommended pressure

and installed on the vehicle or the

TPMS sensor mounted on the

replaced spare wheel is initiated by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer, the

TPMS malfunction indicator and the

low tyre pressure and position tell-

tales will extinguish within a few min-

utes of driving.

If the indicators are not extinguished

after a few minutes of driving, please

visit a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

If a original mounted tyre is

replaced with the spare tyre, the

TPMS sensor on the replaced

spare wheel should be initiated

and the TPMS sensor on the

original mounted wheel should

be deactivated. If the TPMS sen-

sor on the original mounted

wheel located in the spare tyre

carrier still activates, the tyre

pressure monitoring system

may not operate properly. Have

the tyre with TPMS serviced or

replaced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

CAUTION

NEVER use a puncture-repair-

ing agent to repair and/or inflate

a low pressure tyre. The tyre

sealant can damage the tyre

pressure sensor. If used, you

will have to replace the tyre

pressure sensor.

What to do in an emergency

266

You may not be able identify a low

tyre by simply looking at it. Always

use a good quality tyre pressure

gauge to measure the tyre's inflation

pressure. Please note that a tyre that

is hot (from being driven) will have a

higher pressure measurement than a

tyre that is cold (from sitting station-

ary for at least 3 hours and driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that

3 hour period).

Allow the tyre to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tyre is cold before inflating

to the recommended pressure.

A cold tyre means the vehicle has

been sitting for 3 hours and driven for

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3

hour period.

CAUTION

Do not use any tyre sealant if

your vehicle is equipped with a

Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System. The liquid sealant can

damage the tyre pressure sen-

sors.

WARNING - Protecting

TPMS

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)

components may interfere with

the system's ability to warn the

driver of low tyre pressure con-

ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-

tions. Tampering with, modify-

ing, or disabling the Tyre

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) components may void

the warranty for that portion of

the vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tyre dam-

age caused by external fac-

tors such as nails or road

debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-

ity, immediately take your foot

off the accelerator, apply the

brakes gradually and with

light force, and slowly move to

a safe position off the road.

627

What to do in an emergency

TOWING

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we

recommend having it done by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a com-

mercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting

and towing procedures are necessary to

prevent damage to the vehicle. The use

of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommend-

ed.

For trailer towing guidelines information,

refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground (without dol-

lies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-

sion components are damaged or the

vehicle is being towed with the front

wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly

under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow

truck and wheel dollies are not used, the

front of the vehicle should always be lift-

ed, not the rear.

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle backwards

with the front wheels on the

ground as this may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed

equipment.

OED066011

OED066012

dolly

OED066014

OED066013

What to do in an emergency

286

When towing your vehicle in an emer-

gency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (front)

(if equipped)

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tow-

ing hook from the tool case.

2. Remove the hole cover pressing the

lower part of the cover on the front

bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is fully

secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install

the cover after use.

CAUTION

Failure to place the transaxle shift

lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-

nal damage to the transaxle.

OJC060015

629

What to do in an emergency

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer or a commercial

tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tem-

porarily towed using a cable or chain

secured to the emergency towing hook

under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to

steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speed. Also, the wheels,

axles, power train, steering and brakes

must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-

tions from which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the

vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other frequent-

ly.

• Before emergency towing, check if the

hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily

and with even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-

ing may damage the body of your

vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-

cally intended for use in towing

vehicles. Securely fasten the

cable or chain to the towing hook

provided.

OJC060016

■ Front

OJC060017

■ Rear

What to do in an emergency

306

• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5

m) long. Attach a white or red cloth

(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the

middle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strap

is not loosened during towing.

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).

• Release the parking bake.

• Press the brake pedal with more force

than normal since you will have

reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be required

because the power steering system

will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, the

brakes may overheat and brake per-

formance will be reduced. Stop often

and let the brakes cool off.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving manoeuvres which would

place excessive stress on the

emergency towing hook and tow-

ing cable or chain. The hook and

towing cable or chain may break

and cause serious injury or dam-

age.

• If the disabled vehicle is unable

to move, do not forcibly continue

the towing. Contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer or a commer-

cial tow truck service for assis-

tance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-

ing towing.

OED066029

631

What to do in an emergency

Tie-down hook

(for flatbed towing, if equipped)

WARNING

Do not use the tie-down hooks

under the front (or rear) of the vehi-

cle for towing purposes. These

hooks are designed ONLY for trans-

port tie-down. If the tie-down hooks

are used for towing, the tie-down

hooks or front (or rear) bumper will

be damaged and this could lead to

serious injury.

CAUTION - Automatic

transaxle

• If the car is being towed with all

four wheels on the ground, it can

be towed only from the front. Be

sure that the transaxle is in neu-

tral. Be sure the steering is

unlocked by placing the ignition

switch in the ACC position. A

driver must be in the towed vehi-

cle to operate the steering and

brakes.

• To avoid serious damage to the

automatic transaxle, limit the

vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h)

and drive less than 1 mile (1.5

km) when towing.

• Before towing, check the level of

the automatic transaxle fluid. If it

is below the "HOT" range on the

dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot

add fluid, a towing dolly must be

used.

Engine compartment / 7-2

Maintenance services / 7-3

Owner maintenance / 7-5

Scheduled maintenance service / 7-7

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-8

Engine oil / 7-12

Engine coolant / 7-13

Brake/clutch fluid / 7-16

Automatic transaxle fluid / 7-17

Washer fluid / 7-19

Parking brake / 7-19

Fuel filter / 7-20

Air cleaner / 7-21

Wiper blades / 7-22

Battery / 7-25

Tyres and wheels / 7-28

Fuses / 7-38

Light bulbs / 7-49

Appearance care / 7-57

Emission control system / 7-63

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OYN029003R/OYN079002R

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Positive battery terminal

5. Negative battery terminal

6. Fuse box

7. Air cleaner

8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick*

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

12. Fuel filter*

* if equipped

■

Petrol Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehi-

cle may differ from the illustration.

■

Diesel Engine

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to

prevent damage to your vehicle and

injury to yourself whenever performing

any maintenance or inspection proce-

dures.

Should you have any doubts concerning

the inspection or servicing of your vehi-

cle, we strongly recommend that you

have a HYUNDAI authorised repairer

perform this work.

A HYUNDAI authorised repairer has fac-

tory-trained technicians and genuine

HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle

properly. For expert advice and quality

service, see a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient

servicing may result in operational prob-

lems with your vehicle that could lead to

vehicle damage, an accident, or person-

al injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽

NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show

proper maintenance has been performed

on your vehicle in accordance with the

scheduled maintenance service charts.

You need this information to establish

your compliance with the servicing and

maintenance requirements of your vehi-

cle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided

in your Service Passport.

Repairs and adjustments required as a

result of improper maintenance or a lack

of required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehicle

maintained and repaired by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer. A HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer meets HYUNDAI’s high

service quality standards and receives

technical support from HYUNDAI in

order to provide you with a high level of

service satisfaction.

Maintenance

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may

result in problems. This section gives

instructions only for the maintenance

items that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, sev-

eral procedures can be done only by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer with spe-

cial tools.

✽

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during

the warranty period may affect warran-

ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-

rate Service Passport provided with the

vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-

icing or maintenance procedure, have it

done by a HYUNDAI authorised repair-

er.

WARNING - Maintenance

work

• Performing maintenance work on

a vehicle can be dangerous. You

can be seriously injured whilst

performing some maintenance

procedures. If you lack sufficient

knowledge and experience or the

proper tools and equipment to do

the work, have it done by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Working under the bonnet with

the engine running is dangerous.

It becomes even more dangerous

when you wear jewelry or loose

clothing. These can become

entangled in moving parts and

result in injury. Therefore, if you

must run the engine whilst work-

ing under the bonnet, make cer-

tain that you remove all jewelry

(especially rings, bracelets,

watches, and necklaces) and all

neckties, scarves, and similar

loose clothing before getting

near the engine or cooling fans.

WARNING - Diesel Engine

Never work on injection system

with the engine running or within

30 seconds after shutting off the

engine. High-pressure pump, rail,

injectors and high-pressure pipes

are subject to high pressure even

after the engine stopped. The fuel

jet produced by fuel leaks may

cause serious injury, if it touches

the body. People using pacemakers

should not move than 30cm closer

to the ECU or wiring harness within

the engine room whilst engine is

running, since the high currents in

the electronic engine control sys-

tem produce considerable magnet-

ic fields.

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks and

inspections that should be performed by

the owner or a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer at the frequencies indicated to

help ensure safe, dependable operation

of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your repairer

as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are

generally not covered by warranties and

you may be charged for labour, parts and

lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in coolant

reservoir.

• Check the windscreen washer fluid

level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tyres.

Whilst operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes

in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice any increased steering

effort or looseness in the steering

wheel, or change in its straight-ahead

position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns

slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-

elling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for

unusual sounds, pulling to one side,

increased brake pedal travel or “hard-

to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-

ation of your transaxle occurs, check

the transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)

function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-

ing system during or after use is nor-

mal).

WARNING

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant level when the

engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure. This could cause burns

or other serious injury.

Maintenance

At least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-

nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tyres including the spare.

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall):

• Check the radiator, heater and air con-

ditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check the windscreen washer spray

and wiper operation. Clean wiper

blades with clean cloth dampened with

washer fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.

• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.

• Check for worn tyres and loose wheel

lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean the body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate the door hinges and checks,

and bonnet hinges.

• Lubricate the door and bonnet locks

and latches.

• Lubricate the door rubber weather-

strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow the Normal Maintenance

Schedule if the vehicle is usually operat-

ed where none of the following conditions

apply. If any of the following conditions

apply, follow Maintenance Under Severe

Usage Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy

areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in cold

temperatures and/or extremely humid

climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy city

traffic during hot weather above 32°C

(90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under the

above conditions, you should inspect,

replace or refill more frequently than

“Normal Maintenance Schedule which is

provied in your Service Passport.”

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in the

maintenance schedule. If the car is being

driven in severe conditions, more fre-

quent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-

ration and replace if necessary. Drive

belts should be checked periodically for

proper tension and adjusted as neces-

sary.

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven, damage

the emission system and cause multiple

issues such as hard starting. If an exces-

sive amount of foreign matter accumu-

lates in the fuel tank, the filter may

require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine

for several minutes, and check for leaks

at the connections. Fuel filters should be

installed by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections for leakage and damage. Have

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer replace

any damaged or leaking parts immedi-

ately.

WARNING - Diesel only

Never work on the injection system

with the engine running or within

30 seconds after shutting off the

engine. High pressure pump, rail,

injectors and high pressure pipes

are subject to high pressure even

after the engine stops. The fuel jet

produced by fuel leaks may cause

serious injury, if it touches the

body. People using pacemakers

should not move more than 30cm

closer to the ECU or wiring harness

within the engine room whilst the

engine is running, since the high

currents in the Common Rail sys-

tem produce considerable magnet-

ic fields.

Maintenance

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap

The vapour hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those intervals

specified in the maintenance schedule.

Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel

filler cap is correctly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation

hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence

of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard

and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,

abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-

cate deterioration. Particular attention

should be paid to examine those hose

surfaces nearest to high heat sources,

such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that

the hoses do not come in contact with

any heat source, sharp edges or moving

component which might cause heat dam-

age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose

connections, such as clamps and cou-

plings, to make sure they are secure, and

that no leaks are present. Hoses should

be replaced immediately if there is any

evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is

recommended when the filter is

replaced.

Spark plugs (for petrol engine)

Make sure to install new spark plugs of

the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or

engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

A HYUNDAI authorised repairer should

perform the operation.

Cooling system

Check cooling system components, such

as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and

connections for leakage and damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the

intervals specified in the maintenance

schedule.

Manual transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluid

according to the maintenance schedule.

Maintenance

107

Automatic transaxle fluid

(if equipped)

The fluid level should be in the "HOT"

range of the dipstick, after the engine

and transaxle are at normal operating

temperature. Check the automatic

transaxle fluid level with the engine run-

ning and the transaxle in neutral, with the

parking brake properly applied.

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and any

leakage. Replace any deteriorated or

damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid

reservoir. The level should be between

“MIN” (Minimum) and “MAX” (Maximum)

marks on the side of the reservoir. Use

only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to

DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system includ-

ing the parking brake pedal and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and

rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs

for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid

leakage.

For more information on checking the

pads or lining wear limit, refer to the

Hyundai web site.

(http://brakeman

ual.hmc.co.kr)

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for

looseness or damage. Retighten to the

specified torque.

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,

check for excessive free-play in the

steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage.

Check the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

711

Maintenance

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps

for cracks, deterioration, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-

essary, repack the grease.

Air conditioning refrigerant

(if equipped)

Check the air conditioning lines and con-

nections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance

127

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to

return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and

reinsert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check

the level. The level should be between

F (Full) and L (Low).

If it is near or at L (Low), add enough oil

to bring the level to F (Full). Do not over-

fill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from

being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants and capac-

ities” in section 8.)

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the

radiator hose when checking or

adding the engine oil as it may be

hot enough to burn you.

CAUTION

Do not overfill the engine oil. It may

damage the engine.

CAUTION - Diesel engine

Overfilling the engine oil may cause

severe dieseling due to churning

effect. It may lead to engine damage

accompanied with abrupt engine

speed increment, combustion noise

and white smoke emission.

OYN079003 OYN079004

713

Maintenance

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have the engine oil and filter changed by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer accord-

ing to the Maintenance Schedule.

The high-pressure cooling system has a

reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze

coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-

tory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at the

beginning of the winter season, and

before travelling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

ENGINE COOLANT

WARNING - Removing

radiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-

ator cap whilst the engine is

operating or hot. Doing so might

lead to cooling system and

engine damage. Also hot coolant

or steam could cause serious

personal injury.

(Continued)

• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme care

when removing the radiator cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it, and

turn it counterclockwise slowly to

the first stop. Step back whilst

the pressure is released from the

cooling system. When you are

sure all the pressure has been

released, press down on the cap,

using a thick towel, and continue

turning counterclockwise to

remove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-

ing, do not remove the radiator

cap or the drain plug whilst the

engine and radiator are hot. Hot

coolant and steam may still blow

out under pressure, causing seri-

ous injury.

WARNING

Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oils may result in

serious skin disorders including

dermatitis and cancer. Avoid con-

tact with skin as far as possible and

always wash thoroughly after any

contact. Keep used oils out of

reach of children. It is illegal to pol-

lute drains, water courses and soil.

Use only authorised waste collec-

tion facilities including civic ameni-

ty sites and garages for the dispos-

al of used oil and oil filters. If in

doubt, contact the local authority

for disposal instructions.

Maintenance

147

Check the condition and connections of

all cooling system hoses and heater

hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-

rated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between F (Full) and L (Low) marked on

the side of the coolant reservoir when the

engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

specified coolant to provide protection

against freezing and corrosion. Bring the

level to F (Full), but do not overfill. If fre-

quent additions are required, see a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer for a cool-

ing system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant

• Use only soft (distilled) water in the

coolant mixture.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be pro-

tected by an ethylene-glycol-based

coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-

ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the specified

coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less than

35% antifreeze, which would reduce

the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-

lowing table.

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze

Water

OJC070005

715

Maintenance

Changing the coolant

Have the coolant changed by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer according

to the Maintenance schedule.

WARNING - Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine and radiator are

hot. Scalding hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure causing serious injury.

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth or fabric around

the radiator cap before refilling the

coolant in order to prevent the

coolant from overflowing into

engine parts such as the alternator.

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windscreen and may

cause loss of vehicle control or

damage to paint and body trim.

OYN079007

Maintenance

167

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the brake/clutch fluid

level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-

odically. The fluid level should be

between MAX (Maximum) and MIN

(Minimum) marks on the side of the

reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and

adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area

around the reservoir cap thoroughly to

prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

(Maximum) level. The level will fall with

accumulated mileage. This is a normal

condition associated with the wear of the

brake linings and/or clutch disc (if

equipped). If the fluid level is excessively

low, have the brake system checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid.

(Refer to “Recommended lubricants or

capacities” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Loss of brake

fluid

In the event the brake system

requires frequent additions of fluid,

the vehicle should be inspected by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Brake/clutch

fluid

When changing and adding

brake/clutch fluid, handle it careful-

ly. Do not let it come in contact with

your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid

come in contact with your eyes,

immediately flush them with a large

quantity of fresh tap water. Have

your eyes examined by a doctor as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to

contact the vehicle's body paint, as

paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch fluid, which has been

exposed to open air for an extended

time should never be used as its

quality cannot be guaranteed. It

should be properly disposed. Don't

put in the wrong kind of fluid. A few

drops of mineral-based oil, such as

engine oil, in your brake/clutch sys-

tem can damage brake/clutch sys-

tem parts.

OYN079009R

717

Maintenance

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the automatic transaxle

fluid level

The automatic transaxle fluid level

should be checked regularly.

Keep the vehicle on the level ground with

the parking brake applied and check the

fluid level according to the following pro-

cedure.

1.Place the shift lever in N (Neutral) posi-

tion and confirm the engine is running

at normal idle speed.

2.After the transaxle is warmed up suffi-

ciently [fluid temperature 70~80°C

(158~176°F)], for example by 10 min-

utes usual driving, move the shift lever

through all positions then place the

shift lever in N (Neutral) or P (Park)

position.

3.Confirm if the fluid level is in the "HOT"

range on the level gauge. If the fluid

level is lower, add the specified fluid

from the fill hole. If the fluid level is

higher, drain the fluid from the drain

hole.

4.If the fluid level is checked in cold con-

dition [fluid temperature 20~30 °C

(68~86 °F)], add the fluid to the “C”

(COLD) line and then recheck the fluid

level according to the above step 2.

✽

NOTICE

“C” (COLD) range is for reference only

and should NOT be used to determine

transaxle fluid level.

WARNING - Transaxle fluid

The transaxle fluid level should be

checked when the engine is at nor-

mal operating temperature. This

means that the engine, radiator,

radiator hose and exhaust system

etc., are very hot. Exercise great

care not to burn yourself during

this procedure.

WARNING - Parking brake

To avoid sudden movement of the

vehicle, apply parking brake and

depress the brake pedal before

moving the shift lever.

CAUTION

• Low fluid level causes transaxle

shift slippage. Overfilling can

cause foaming, loss of fluid and

transaxle malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transaxle malfunc-

tion and failure.

OYN079010

OSA077009

COLD

HOT

↔

Maintenance

187

✽

NOTICE

New automatic transaxle fluid should be

red. The red dye is added so the assem-

bly plant can identify it as automatic

transaxle fluid and distinguish it from

engine oil or antifreeze. The red dye,

which is not an indicator of fluid quali-

ty, is not permanent. As the vehicle is

driven, the automatic transaxle fluid

will begin to look darker. The colour

may eventually appear light brown.

Therefore, have a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer change the automatic

transaxle fluid according to the

Scheduled Maintenance.

Use only specified automatic transaxle

fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants

or capacities" in section 8.)

Changing the automatic transaxle

fluid

Have the automatic transaxle fluid

changed by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer according to the Maintenance

Schedule.

719

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid

reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain

water may be used if washer fluid is not

available. However, use washer solvent

with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake by

counting the number of “clicks’’ heard

whilst fully applying it from the released

position. Also, the parking brake alone

should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-

ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or

less than specified, have the parking

brake adjusted by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of

44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

PARKING BRAKE

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windscreen and may

cause loss of vehicle control or

damage to the paint and body

trim.

• Windscreen washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alcohol

and can be flammable under cer-

tain circumstances. Do not allow

sparks or flame come in contact

with the washer fluid or the wash-

er fluid reservoir. Damage to the

vehicle or occupants could

occur.

• Windscreen washer fluid is poi-

sonous to humans and animals.

Do not drink and avoid coming in

contact with the windscreen

washer fluid. Serious injury or

death could occur.

OYN059020/HOYN079011

Maintenance

207

FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)

Draining water from the fuel filter

The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an

important role of separating water from

fuel and accumulating the water in its

bottom.

If water accumulates in the fuel filter, the

warning light comes on when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

If this warning light illuminates,

take your car to a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer and have

the water drained and

checked.

Extracting air from the fuel filter

If you drove until you have no fuel left or

if you replaced the fuel filter, be sure to

extract air in the fuel system as it makes

you difficult to start the engine.

1. Remove the air extract nozzle cap on

the fuel filter.

2. Pump up and down until the fuel flows

out of the plug opening.

✽

NOTICE

• Use cloths when you extract air so that

the fuel is not sprayed around.

• Clean the fuel around the fuel filter or

the injection pump before starting the

engine to prevent fire.

• Finally, check each part if the fuel is

leaking.

Fuel filter cartridge replacement

✽

NOTICE

When replacing the fuel filter cartridge,

use HYUNDAI genuine parts.

CAUTION

If the water accumulated in the fuel

filter is not drained at proper times,

damages to the major parts such as

the fuel system can be caused by

water permeation in the fuel filter.

OYN079012R

721

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

You can clean the filter when inspecting

the air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed air.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching

clips and open the cover.

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching

clips.

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual recom-

mended intervals. (Refer to

“Maintenance under severe usage condi-

tions” in this section.)

OYN079014

OYN079015

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces-

sive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner fil-

ter, be careful that dust or dirt

does not enter the air intake, or

damage may result.

• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use

of nongenuine parts could dam-

age the air flow sensor, tur-

bocharger or engine.

Maintenance

227

WIPER BLADES

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manual-

ly.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper malfunc-

tion and failure.

Blade inspection

✽

NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-

matic car washes have been known to

make the windscreen difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windscreen

or the wiper blades with foreign matter

can reduce the effectiveness of the wind-

screen wipers. Common sources of con-

tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot

wax treatments used by some commer-

cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-

ing properly, clean both the window and

the blades with a good cleaner or mild

detergent, and rinse thoroughly with

clean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean ade-

quately, the blades may be worn or

cracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122/H

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use petrol, kerosene,

paint thinner, or other solvents on

or near them.

723

Maintenance

Front windscreen wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Press the button and slide the blade

assembly upward.

3. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

screen.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windscreen, since it

may chip or crack the windscreen.

OYN079060/H OYN079061R OYN079062/H

Maintenance

247

Rear window wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the

wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the centre part into the slot in

the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is

installed firmly by trying to pull it slight-

ly.

4. Place back the wiper arm to the prop-

er position.

OED076041

OED076040

725

Maintenance

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleum

jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the

battery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for

an extended time, disconnect the bat-

tery cables.

WARNING - Battery

dangers

Always read the following

instructions carefully when

handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and

all other flames or sparks

away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-

bustible gas, is always

present in battery cells and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the

reach of children because

batteries contain highly

corrosive SULFURIC ACID.

Do not allow battery acid to

contact your skin, eyes,

clothing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into

your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least

15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention.

(Continued)

If electrolyte gets on your

skin, thoroughly wash the

contacted area. If you feel a

pain or a burning sensa-

tion, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection when

charging or working near a

battery. Always provide

ventilation when working in

an enclosed space.

An inappropriately dis-

posed battery can be harm-

ful to the environment and

human health.

Dispose the battery accord-

ing to your local law(s) or

regulation.

Lead may be returned and

recycled.

(Continued)

BATTERY

OJC070016R

Maintenance

267

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, the

headlights or interior lights were left on

whilst the vehicle was not in use),

recharge it by slow charging (trickle)

for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load whilst the

vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-

30A for two hours.

(Continued)

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on the

case may cause battery acid to

leak, resulting in personal injury.

Lift with a battery carrier or with

your hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge the

battery when the battery cables

are connected.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. Never

touch these components with the

engine running or the ignition

switched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-

ings can result in serious bodily

injury or death.

CAUTION - AGM battery

(if equipped)

• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) bat-

teries are maintenance-free and

should only be serviced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer. For

charging your AGM battery, use

only fully automatic battery

chargers that are specially devel-

oped for AGM batteries.

• When replacing the AGM battery,

use only the HYUNDAI genuine

battery for the ISG system.

• Do not open or remove the cap on

top of the battery. This may cause

leaks of internal electrolyte that

could result in severe injury.

• If the AGM battery is reconnected

or replaced, ISG function will not

operate immediately.

If you want to use the ISG func-

tion, the battery sensor needs to

be calibrated for approximately 4

hours with the ignition off.

727

Maintenance

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery

has been discharged or the battery has

been disconnected.

• Auto up/down window (See section 4)

• Sunroof (See section 4)

• Trip computer (See section 4)

• Climate control system

(See section 4)

• Clock (See section 4)

• Audio (See section 4)

WARNING

• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn off

all accessories and stop the

engine.

• The negative battery cable must

be removed first and installed

last when the battery is discon-

nected.

WARNING - Recharging

battery

When recharging the battery,

observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in an

area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,

or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-

ing, and stop or reduce the charg-

ing rate if the battery cells begin

gassing (boiling) violently or if

the temperature of the electrolyte

of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-

ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in

the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main

switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.

Maintenance

287

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is

possible. Keep your tyre pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tyre frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• Overinflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the centre of the tyre tread,

and a greater possibility of

damage from road hazards.

TYRES AND WHEELS

Tyre care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tyre

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tyre inflation

pressures

All tyre pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tyres are cold. “Cold Tyres” means

the vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

one mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must be

maintained for the best ride, top vehi-

cle handling, and minimum tyre

wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,

refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the vehicle.

WARNING - Tyre underin-

flation

Severe underinflation (10 psi

(0.7 bar) or more) can lead to

severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tyre failures that can

result in the loss of vehicle con-

trol leading to severe injury or

death. This risk is much higher

on hot days and when driving

for long periods at high speeds.

OYN089003R

729

Maintenance

Checking tyre inflation pressure

Check your tyres once a month or

more.

Also, check the tyre pressure of the

spare tyre.

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check

tyre pressure. You can not tell if your

tyres are properly inflated simply by

looking at them. Radial tyres may

look properly inflated even when

they're underinflated.

Check the tyre's inflation pressure

when the tyres are cold. - "Cold"

means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no

more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tyre Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation

can reduce tyre life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tyre failure. This

could result in loss of vehicle

control and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tyre pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tyre pressure when the

tyres are cold. (After vehicle

has been parked for at least

three hours or hasn't been

driven more than one mile (1.6

km) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your

spare tyre each time you

check the pressure of other

tyres.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a

vehicle luggage rack if your

vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tyres can cause

accidents. If your tread is

badly worn, or if your tyres

have been damaged, replace

them.

CAUTION

• Warm tyres normally exceed

recommended cold tyre pres-

sures by 4 to 6 psi (0.28 to 0.41

bar). Do not release air from

warm tyres to adjust the pres-

sure or the tyres will be under-

inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tyre

inflation valve caps. Without

the valve cap, dirt or moisture

could get into the valve core

and cause air leakage. If a

valve cap is missing, install a

new one as soon as possible.

Maintenance

307

Remove the valve cap from the tyre

valve stem. Press the tyre gauge

firmly onto the valve to get a pres-

sure measurement. If the cold tyre

inflation pressure matches the rec-

ommended pressure on the tyre and

loading information label, no further

adjustment is necessary. If the pres-

sure is low, add air until you reach

the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tyre, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the

tyre pressure with the tyre gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. They help prevent

leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-

ture.

Tyre rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recom-

mended that the tyres be rotated

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tyres for

correct balance.

When rotating tyres, check for

uneven wear and damage. Abnormal

wear is usually caused by incorrect

tyre pressure, improper wheel align-

ment, out-of-balance wheels, severe

braking or severe cornering. Look for

bumps or bulges in the tread or side

of tyre. Replace the tyre if you find

either of these conditions. Replace

the tyre if fabric or cord is visible.

After rotation, be sure to bring the

front and rear tyre pressures to spec-

ification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section

WARNING

• Inspect your tyres frequently

for proper inflation as well as

wear and damage. Always use

a tyre pressure gauge.

• Tyres with too much or too lit-

tle pressure wear unevenly

causing poor handling, loss of

vehicle control, and sudden

tyre failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

The recommended cold tyre

pressure for your vehicle can

be found in this manual and on

the tyre label located on the

driver's side centre pillar.

• Worn tyres can cause acci-

dents. Replace tyres that are

worn, show uneven wear, or

are damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-

sure of your spare tyre.

HYUNDAI recommends that

you check the spare every

time you check the pressure

of the other tyres on your

vehicle.

731

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tyres are rotated.

✽

NOTICE

Rotate radial tyres that have an

asymmetric tread pattern only from

front to rear and not from right to

left.

Wheel alignment and tyre balance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tyre

life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tyre

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare

tyre for tyre rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tyres under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that could result in death,

severe injury, or property

damage.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can

damage your vehicle's alu-

minum wheels. Use only

approved wheel weights.

CBGQ0706

CBGQ0707

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tyre or with a compact spare tyre

With a full-size spare tyre

Directional tyres (if equipped)

Maintenance

327

Tyre replacement

If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread

wear indicator will appear as a solid

band across the tread. This shows

there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch)

of tread left on the tyre. Replace the

tyre when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tyre.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

WARNING - Replacing

tyres

To reduce the chance or serious

or fatal injuries from an acci-

dent caused by tyre failure or

loss of vehicle control:

• Replace tyres that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tyres can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

too little or too much pressure

in your tyres. This can lead to

uneven wear and tyre failure.

• When replacing tyres, never

mix radial and bias-ply tyres

on the same car. You must

replace all tyres (including the

spare) if moving from radial to

bias-ply tyres.

(Continued)

• Using tyres and wheel other

than the recommended sizes

could cause unusual handling

characteristics and poor vehi-

cle control, resulting in a seri-

ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meet

HYUNDAI’s specifications

may fit poorly and result in

damage to the vehicle or

unusual handling and poor

vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparing

the speed of the wheels. Tyre

size can affect wheel speed.

When replacing tyres, all 4

tyres must use the same size

originally supplied with the

vehicle. Using tyres of a dif-

ferent size can cause the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) and

ESP (Electronic Stability

Program) to work irregularly.

(if equipped)

733

Maintenance

Compact spare tyre replacement

(if equipped)

A compact spare tyre has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tyre.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tyre.

The replaced compact spare tyre

should be the same size and design

tyre as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tyre

wheel. The compact spare tyre is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tyre wheel is not designed to mount

a regular size tyre.

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

Tyre traction

Tyre traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tyres, tyres that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tyres should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. Slow down whenever there

is rain, snow or ice on the road, to

reduce the possibility of losing con-

trol of the vehicle.

Tyre maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps decrease tyre

wear. If you find a tyre worn uneven-

ly, have your dealer check the wheel

alignment.

When you have new tyres installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct

size may adversely affect wheel

and bearing life, braking and

stopping abilities, handling

characteristics, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tyre clearance,

snow chain clearance,

speedometer and odometer cal-

ibration, headlight aim and

bumper height.

Maintenance

347

Tyre sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tyre and also provides

the tyre identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tyre in

case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

2. Tyre size designation

A tyre’s sidewall is marked with a tyre

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tyres for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tyre size designation

mean.

Example tyre size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tyre size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

P205/55R16 91H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tyres

marked with the prefix “P’’ are

intended for use on passenger

cars or light trucks; however, not

all tyres have this marking).

205 - Tyre width in millimeters.

55 - Aspect ratio. The tyre’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tyre construction code (Radial).

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

91 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tyre can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.0JX16

6.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

5,6

735

Maintenance

Tyre speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger car tyres. The

speed rating is part of the tyre size

designation on the sidewall of the

tyre. This symbol corresponds to that

tyre's designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

3. Checking tyre life (TIN : Tyre

Identification Number)

Any tyres that are over 6 years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tyre) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tyre

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tyre consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tyre size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1610 represents

that the tyre was produced in the

16th week of 2010.

4. Tyre ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tyre. Tyre

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tyre, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D" means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

168 mph (270 km/h)

Maximum Speed

Speed

Rating

Symbol

WARNING - Tyre age

Tyres degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, it is recommended that

tyres generally be replaced

after six (6) years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot cli-

mates or frequent high loading

conditions can accelerate the

aging process. Failure to follow

this warning could cause sud-

den tyre failure, which could

lead to a loss of control and an

accident involving serious

injury or death.

* W speed rating is sub-category of the Z

speed rating.

Maintenance

367

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tyre. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tyre and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tyre. When

replacing the tyres on the vehicle,

always use a tyre that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tyre.

7. Uniform tyre quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tyre sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:

TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tyre when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tyre

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tyre graded

100.

The relative performance of tyres

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle

tyres.The tyres available as standard

or optional equipment on your vehi-

cle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tyre’s ability to

stop on wet pavement measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tyre is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

737

Maintenance

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tyre’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tyre to

degenerate and reduce tyre life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tyre failure. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perform-

ance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING - Tyre

temperature

The temperature grade for this

tyre is established for a tyre that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat

build-up and sudden tyre fail-

ure. This can cause loss of vehi-

cle control and serious injury or

death.

Maintenance

387

FUSES

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected

from electrical overload damage by

fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one

located in the driver’s side panel bolster,

the other in the engine compartment

near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check the

appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has

blown, the element inside the fuse will be

melted.

If the electrical system does not work,

first check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of

the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-

cates an electrical problem. Avoid using

the system involved and immediately

consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type

for lower amperage rating, cartridge type

and multi fuse for higher amperage rat-

ings.

OJC070046

Normal

■ Cartridge type

■ Multi fuse

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fuse replace-

ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a

fire.

• Never install a wire instead of the

proper fuse - even as a temporary

repair. It may cause extensive

wiring damage and a possible fire.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove fuses

because it may cause a short circuit

and damage the system.

■ Blade type

Normal Blown

739

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse replace-

ment

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.

Use the removal tool provided in the

engine compartment fuse panel cover.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of

the same rating from a circuit you may

not need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-

ponents do not work and the fuses are

OK, check the fuse panel in the engine

compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must

be replaced.

OYN079023OYN079018R

Maintenance

407

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memory

fuse to prevent battery discharge if your

vehicle is parked without being operated

for prolonged periods. Use the following

procedures before parking the vehicle for

prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the memory fuse.

✽

NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up from

the fuse panel, the warning chime,

audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,

will not operate. Some items must be

reset after replacement. Refer to

“Battery” in this section.

• Even though the memory fuse is

pulled up, the battery can still be dis-

charged by operation of the head-

lights or other electrical devices.

Engine compartment panel fuse

replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-

ing the tab and pulling up the cover.

OJC070020R

OYN079021/OYN079022

Diesel only

741

Maintenance

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,

use the fuse puller in the engine com-

partment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽

NOTICE

If the main fuse is blown, consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse panel in the

engine compartment, securely

install the fuse panel cover. If not,

electrical failures may occur from

water leaking in.

OYN079019

Maintenance

427

✽

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your vehi-

cle, the information is accurate at the

time of printing. When you inspect the

fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the

fuse panel label.

Inner fuse panel

Engine compartment fuse panel

OYN079024R/OYN079025/OYN079026

Diesel only

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

743

Maintenance

Inner fuse panel

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component

25A POWER WINDOW Left Power Window

25A POWER WINDOW Right Power Window

10A OUTSIDE MIRROR HEATED Outside Mirror Defroster

10A BLOWER Air Conditioning System, ECU

20A DOOR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock

20A SUNROOF Sunroof

15A SAFETY POWER WINDOW Safety Power Window (Driver)

10A FOLDING MIRROR Outside Mirror Folding Switch, Centre Facia Switch

10A TAIL LAMP Left Tail Light

10A TAIL LAMP Right Tail Light

10A START Start Moter Relay

10A DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT BCM

15A HAZARD WARNING SIGNAL Centre Facia Switch

25A

POWER DISTRIBUTION

MODULE

Smk Uint

10A

POWER DISTRIBUTION

MODULE

Smk Uint, SSB

Maintenance

447

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component

15A

TRANSMISSION

CONTROL UNIT

Speed In Sensor, Speed Out Sensor, Speed Sensor, Inhibitor Switch

10A IGNITION COIL Ignition Coil, Condensor

10A IGNITION

HLLD Switch, HLLD Actuator, BCM, Air Conditioning System, Sunroof,

ETCS

25A

WINDSCREEN WIPING

SYSTEM (CONTINUOUS)

Front Wiper Moter Relay, Multi Function Switch Wiper

10A FRONT FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamp, BCM

10A REAR FOG LAMP Rear Fog Lamp, BCM

10A ROOM LAMP Room Lamp Switch, MUT

15A STOP LAMP Stop Switch, BCM

10A CLUSETER Cluster, BCM, Digtal Clock

10A IGNITION Audio,TPMS, IMMOUNIT, Centre Facia Switch

10A ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Yaw Rate Sensor, ABS(ESP),ESP Switch

10A B/UP LP Back Up Switch

10A

ELECTRONIC (ENGINE)

CONTROL UNIT

ECU, AFS

10A

RAIN SENSOR

(PTC HEATER )

Rain Sensor Relay (PTC, Fuel Filter Heater)

10A

POWER DISTRIBUTION

MODULE

Smart key Uint

745

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component

15A

FRONT HEAT RAYS JOIN

GLASS

Front Deicer, BCM

15A POWER OUTLET Front Power Outlet

25A POWER OUTLET Rear Power Outlet, Centre Power Outlet

10A IGNITION Audio, BCM, DC DC Converter, Digtal Clock

10A AIR BAG INDICATOR Cluster (Air Bag Indicator)

10A AIR BAG ACU

10A

DIRECTION INDICATOR

TURN SIGNAL LAMP

Centre Facia Switch

10A

POWER DISTRIBUTION

MODULE

Smart key Unit

10A STATICBENDING LAMP BCM

15A WIPER SYSTEM RR Rear Wiper Motor, Rain Sensor, Multi Function Switch Wiper

15A SEAT HEATER Centre Facia Switch

20A AUDIO Audio

10A LUGGAGE LP Luggage Lamp

Maintenance

467

Engine compartment fuse panel

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component

50A IGNITION Start Sol, IGN_SW

50A BATTERY

I/P Junction(Stop Lamp 15A,Tail Lamp Relay, Room Lamp, Luggage

10A,Tail Lamp LH 10A, Tail Lamp RH 10A)

30A FUEL FILTER HEATER Fuel Filter Heater (Diesel)

125A/150A ALTERNATOR Alternator

40A ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS,ESP

40A

REAR HEAT RAYS JOIN

GLASS

I/P Junction(Rear Heater Relay, Heated Mirror 10A)

40A BLOWER Blower Motor

80A

MOTOR DRIVEN POWER

STEERING

MDPS(Motor Driven Power Steering)

30A IGNITION Ignition Switch (IG1, Accessory)

40A COOLING FAN Cooling Fan Relay(High), Cooling Fan Relay(Low)

30A

ELECTRONIC (ENGINE)

CONTROL UNIT

"Main Relay, ECU 4 10A, ECU 1 20A, ECU 3 10A, Sensor 1 10A, Sensor 2

10A,Injector 15A"

50A BATTERY

"I/P Junction(Hazard 15A, Power Window Relay, Power window LH 25A,

Power window RH 25A ,Safety Power window 15A, Sunroof 20A, PDM 2

10A, Deicer 15A, Folding 10A, PDM1 25A, Door Lock 20A)"

747

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component

20A HEADLAMP HIGH BEAMS Headlamp High Beam

10A HORN Horn, Burglar Alarm Horn, Battery Sensor

20A HEADLAMP DIPPED BEAMS Headlamp Low Beam

20A FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Relay (Petrol)

10A

ELECTRONIC (ENGINE)

CONTROL UNIT/AIR HTR

ECU

15A INJECTOR

INJECTOR, FUEL PUMP RELAY (PETROL)

E-EGR, WGT, E-EGR, CPS, FUEL HEATER RELAY (DIESEL)

10A SENSOR 1

AIR CONDITIONING RELAY, STOP SW, COOLING FAN RELAY (HIGH),

COOLING FAN RELAY (LOW)

10A B/UP LP

"Injector, Fuel Pump Relay(Petrol)E-EGR, WGT, E-EGR, CPS, Fuel Heater

Relay(Diesel)"

10A SENSOR 2

Air Conditioning Relay, Stop SW, Cooling Fan Relay(High), Cooling Fan

Rela(Low)

10A AIR CONDITIONER Air Conditioning Relay

10A HEADLAMP DIPPED BEAMS Cluster(Low Indicator), Head Lamp Low LH

20A

ELECTRONIC(ENGINE)

CONTROL UNIT

ECU

10A HEADLAMP DIPPED BEAMS Head Lamp Low RH

10A

ELECTRONIC(ENGINE)

CONTROL UNIT

ECU, TCU, GLOW Relay

Maintenance

487

Engine compartment fuse panel (Diesel engine only)

Description Fuse rating System Protected Component

PTC HTR 1 50A PTC Heater 1 PTC Heater 1

PTC HTR 2 50A PTC Heater 2 PTC Heater 2

PTC HTR 3 50A PTC Heater 3 PTC Heater 3

GLOW 80A GLOW Plug GLOW Plug

749

Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS

Use only the bulbs of the specified

wattage.

✽

NOTICE

After heavy, driving rain or washing,

headlight and taillight lenses could

appear frosty. This condition is caused by

the temperature difference between the

lamp inside and outside. This is similar

to the condensation on your windows

inside your vehicle during the rain and

doesn’t indicate a problem with your

vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp

bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Headlight, position light, turn sig-

nal light, front fog light bulb

replacement

(1) Headlight (Low)

(2) Headlight (High)

(3) Smart cornering light*

(4) Position light

(5) Front turn signal light

(6) Front fog light*

* if equipped

WARNING - Working on

the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly

apply the parking brake, ensure

that the ignition switch is turned to

the LOCK position and turn off the

lights to avoid sudden movement

of the vehicle and burning your fin-

gers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION

Be sure to replace the burned-out

bulb with one of the same wattage

rating. Otherwise, it may cause

damage to the fuse or electric

wiring system.

CAUTION

If you don’t have necessary tools,

the correct bulbs and the expertise,

consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer. In many cases, it is difficult

to replace vehicle light bulbs

because other parts of the vehicle

must be removed before you can

get to the bulb. This is especially

true if you have to remove the head-

light assembly to

get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing

the headlight

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

OJC070027

Maintenance

507

Headlight bulb

1. Open the bonnet.

(Continued)

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-

ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool

down before handling it.

G270A03O

WARNING -

Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flying

pieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,

and avoid scratches and abra-

sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid

contact with liquids. Never touch

the glass with bare hands.

Residual oil may cause the bulb

to overheat and burst when lit. A

bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlight.

(Continued)

OJC070028

OJC070031

OJC070030

■ High beam

■ Low beam

■ Smart cornering light

751

Maintenance

2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise.

3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-

connector.

4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining

wire by depressing the end and push-

ing it upward.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly.

6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap

the headlight bulb retaining wire into

position by aligning the wire with the

groove on the bulb.

7. Connect the headlight bulb socket

connector.

8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-

ing it clockwise.

Position light

1. Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise.

2. Remove the socket from the assembly

by pulling it out.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Insert a new bulb into the socket.

5. Install the socket into the assembly by

pushing it in.

Turn signal light

1. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

2. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket.

3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.

4. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

OJC070032

OJC070029

Maintenance

527

Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)

1. Reach your hand into the back of the

front bumper.

2. Disconnect the power connector from

the socket.

3. Remove the bulb-socket from the

housing by turning the socket counter

clockwise until the tabs on the socket

align with the slots on the housing.

4. Install the new bulb-socket into the

housing by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the housing.

Push the socket into the housing and

turn the socket clockwise.

5. Connect the power connector to the

socket.

✽

NOTICE

If the headlight aiming adjustment is

necessary after the headlight assembly is

reinstalled, consult a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Side repeater light bulb replace-

ment

Type A

If the light bulb does not operate, have

the vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

OJC070045

753

Maintenance

Type B

1. Remove the light assembly from the

vehicle by pushing the lens forward

and pulling the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connec-

tor.

3. Separate the socket and the lens parts

by turning the socket counter clock-

wise until the tabs on the socket align

with the slots on the lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the lens

part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

Rear combination light bulb

replacement

(1) Stop and tail light

(2) Rear turn signal light

(3) Back-up light

(4) Tail light

(5) Rear fog light

1. Open the tailgate.

Outside

2-1. Loosen the outside light assembly

retaining screws with a cross-tip

screwdriver.

2-2. Remove the rear combination light

assembly from the body of the vehi-

cle.

OJC070036

OJC070037

OJC070038

OYN079051

Maintenance

547

Inside

2. Remove the tailgate trim by removing

the screws.

3. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with the

slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the

socket and pushing or rotating it until it

locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

7. Reinstall the light assembly to the body

of the vehicle.

8. Tighten the screws.

OJC070039

OJC070041

■ Outside

■ Inside

OJC070040

755

Maintenance

Rear fog light

1. Remove the rear bumper.

2. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

3. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket.

4. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

5. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

High mounted stop light

replacement (if equipped)

If the light does not operate, have the

vehicle checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

License plate light bulb replace-

ment

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the tailgate trim by removing

the screws.

3. Remove the lens by pushing the cover.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

5. Install a new bulb.

6. Reinstall the lens securely.

OJC070044

OJC070042

Maintenance

567

Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently

pry the lens from the interior light

housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap the

lens into place.

■ Front map lamp

■ Side room lamp/Vanity mirror lamp

OYN079052/H/OYN079049

■ Glove box lamp

■ Luggage room lamp

OYN079046/OYN079047/OJC070043

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-

ton is depressed to avoid burning

your fingers or receiving an electric

shock.

CAUTION

Use care not to dirty or damage

lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

■ Centre room lamp

757

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning and

caution statements that appear on the

label.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from

rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly

and frequently at least once a month with

lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-

ing, you should wash it after each off-

road trip. Pay special attention to the

removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,

mud, and other foreign materials. Make

sure the drain holes in the lower edges of

the doors and rocker panels are kept

clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar deposits

can damage your vehicle’s finish if not

removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water

may not completely remove all these

deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on

painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do

not allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING - Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes whilst driving slowly to see

if they have been affected by water.

If braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly whilst maintaining a slow

forward speed.

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressure

water washing may cause the fail-

ure of electrical circuits located in

the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electri-

cal/electronic components inside

the vehicle as this may damage

them.

OJB037800

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do

not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side

windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water, water may leak through the

windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic

parts, do not clean with chemical

solvents or strong detergents.

Maintenance

587

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing. Use a good quality liquid or

paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect

it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials

with a spot remover will usually strip the

wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax

these areas even if the rest of the vehicle

does not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust

and may develop into a major repair

expense.

✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires

any metal repair or replacement, be sure

the body shop applies anti-corrosion

materials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or other

sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal

parts from corrosion, apply a coating of

wax or chrome preservative and rub to

a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts with

a heavier coating of wax or preserva-

tive. If necessary, coat the parts with

non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other

protective compound.

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plated

or anodized aluminum parts. This

may result in damage to the pro-

tective coating and cause discol-

oration or paint deterioration.

759

Maintenance

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may col-

lect on the underbody. If these materials

are not removed, accelerated rusting can

occur on the underbody parts such as

the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and

exhaust system, even though they have

been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody

and wheel openings with lukewarm or

cold water once a month, after off-road

driving and at the end of each winter. Pay

special attention to these areas because

it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It

will do more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it. The

lower edges of the doors, rocker panels,

and frame members have drain holes

that should not clog with dirt; trapped

water in these areas can cause rusting.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a

clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wire

brushes on aluminum wheels. They

may scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-

gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.

Also, be sure to clean the wheels after

driving on salted roads. This helps pre-

vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-

speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any acid detergent. It may

damage and corrode the aluminum

wheels coated with a clear protective

finish.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes whilst driving slowly to see

if they have been affected by water.

If braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly whilst maintaining a slow

forward speed.

Maintenance

607

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and

construction practices to combat corro-

sion, we produce vehicles of the highest

quality. However, this is only part of the

job. To achieve the long-term corrosion

resistance your vehicle can deliver, the

owner's cooperation and assistance is

also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the

vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings

by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor

scrapes and dents which leave unpro-

tected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle

is regularly exposed to corrosive materi-

als, corrosion protection is particularly

important. Some of the common causes

of accelerated corrosion are road salts,

dust control chemicals, ocean air and

industrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which

corrosion is most likely to occur. For

example, corrosion is accelerated by

high humidity, particularly when tempera-

tures are just above freezing. In such

conditions, the corrosive material is kept

in contact with the vehicle’s surface by

moisture that slowly evaporates.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it

dries slowly and holds moisture in con-

tact with the vehicle. Although the mud

appears to be dry, it can still retain mois-

ture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate

corrosion of parts that are not properly

ventilated so the moisture can be dis-

persed. For all these reasons, it is par-

ticularly important to keep your vehicle

clean and free of mud or accumulations

of other materials. This applies not only

to the visible surfaces but particularly to

the underside of the vehicle.

761

Maintenance

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get-

ting started by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to

keep your vehicle clean and free of cor-

rosive materials. Attention to the under-

side of the vehicle is particularly impor-

tant.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —

where road salts are used, near the

ocean, areas with industrial pollution,

acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra

care to prevent corrosion. In winter,

hose off the underside of your vehicle

at least once a month and be sure to

clean the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle,

give particular attention to the compo-

nents under the fenders and other

areas that are hidden from view. Do a

thorough job; just dampening the accu-

mulated mud rather than washing it

away will accelerate corrosion rather

than prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly effec-

tive in removing accumulated mud and

corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members, be

sure that drain holes are kept open so

that moisture can escape and not be

trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorly

ventilated garage. This creates a favor-

able environment for corrosion. This is

particularly true if you wash your vehicle

in the garage or drive it into the garage

when it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage can

contribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be

covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as

possible to reduce the possibility of cor-

rosion. If bare metal is showing through,

the attention of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-

ly corrosive and may damage painted

surfaces in just a few hours. Always

remove bird droppings as soon as possi-

ble.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats

and carpeting and cause corrosion.

Check under the mats periodically to be

sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular

care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning

materials or chemicals in the vehicle.

These should be carried only in proper

containers and any spills or leaks should

be cleaned up, flushed with clean water

and thoroughly dried.

Maintenance

627

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as per-

fume and cosmetic oil from contacting

the dashboard because they may cause

damage or discoloration. If they do con-

tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-

diately. See the instructions for the prop-

er way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior

trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean with a mild soap solution recom-

mended for upholstery or carpets.

Remove fresh spots immediately with a

fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not

receive immediate attention, the fabric

can be stained and its color can be

affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties

can be reduced if the material is not

properly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-

bing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for cleaning

upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-

tions provided with the soap. Do not

bleach or re-dye the webbing because

this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-

cle become fogged (that is, covered with

an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should

be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the

directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electrical/

electronic components inside the

vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may affect

the fabric’s appearance and fire-

resistant properties.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside

of the rear window. This may result

in damage to the rear window

defroster grid.

CAUTION

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alcohol

content solutions. If you use high

alcohol content solutions or

acid/alkaline detergents, the colour

of the leather may fade or the sur-

face may get stripped off.

763

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty infor-

mation contained in the Service Passport

in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-

sion control system to meet all emission

regulations.

There are three emission control sys-

tems which are as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of

the emission control systems, it is rec-

ommended that you have your vehicle

inspected and maintained by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer in accor-

dance with the maintenance schedule.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Program (ESP) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,

turn the Electronic Stability

Program (ESP) system off by press-

ing the ESP switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-

pleted, turn the ESP system back on

by pressing the ESP switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-

tem is employed to prevent air pollution

caused by blow-by gases being emitted

from the crankcase.This system supplies

fresh filtered air to the crankcase through

the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,

which then pass through the PCV valve

into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control

system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapours from escaping into the atmos-

phere.

Maintenance

647

Canister

Fuel vapours generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapours absorbed in the

canister are drawn into the surge tank

through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-

trolled by the Engine Control Module

(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-

ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-

es so that evaporated fuel is not taken

into the engine. After the engine warms

up during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the

engine.

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is

a highly effective system which controls

exhaust emissions whilst maintaining

good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect

its performance, safety or durability and

may even violate governmental safety

and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modification

may not be covered under warranty.

Engine exhaust gas precautions (car-

bon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside

your vehicle, have it inspected and

repaired immediately. If you ever sus-

pect exhaust fumes are coming into

your vehicle, drive it only with all the

windows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain car-

bon monoxide (CO). Though

colourless and odourless, it is dan-

gerous and could be lethal if

inhaled. Follow the instructions on

this page to avoid CO poisoning.

765

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confined

or closed areas (such as garages) any

more than what is necessary to move

the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short time

with the engine running, adjust the

ventilation system (as needed) to draw

outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-

cle for any extended time with the

engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,

excessive attempts to restart the

engine may cause damage to the

emission control system.

Operating precautions for catalytic

converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic

converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions

must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for petrol

engine.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, such

as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-

formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.

Examples of misuse are coasting with

the ignition off and descending steep

grades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle

speed for extended periods (5 minutes

or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part

of the engine or emission control sys-

tem. All inspections and adjustments

must be made by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

catalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautions

could result in damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your

warranties.

WARNING - Fire

A hot exhaust system can ignite

flammable items under your vehi-

cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flammable

objects, such as grass, vegetation,

paper, leaves, etc.

Maintenance

667

Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) sys-

tem removes the soot emitted from the

vehicle.

Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF

system automatically burns (oxidizes)

and removes the accumulated soot

according to the driving condition. In

other words, the active burning by engine

control system and high exhaust gas

temperature caused by normal/high driv-

ing condition burns and removes the

accumulated soot.

However, if the vehicle continues to be

driven at low speed for a long time, the

accumulated soot may not be automati-

cally removed because of low exhaust

gas temperature. In this particular case,

the amount of soot is out of detection

limit, the soot oxidation process by

engine control system may not happen

and the malfunction indicator light may

blink.

When the malfunction indicator light

blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the

vehicle at more than 37 mph (60km/h) or

at more than second gear with 1500 ~

2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for

about 25 minutes).

If the malfunction indicator light contin-

ues to blink in spite of the procedure,

please visit a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer and check the DPF system.

If you continue to drive with the malfunc-

tion indicator light blinking for a long

time, the DPF system can be damaged

and fuel consumption can worsen.

CAUTION - Diesel Fuel

(if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regu-

lated automotive diesel fuel for

diesel vehicle equipped with the

DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high

sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)

and unspecified additives, it can

cause the DPF system to be dam-

aged and white smoke can be emit-

ted.

Engine / 8-2

Dimensions / 8-2

Bulb wattage / 8-2

Tyres and wheels / 8-3

Weight/Volume / 8-3

Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-7

Vehicle certification label / 8-7

Tyre specification and pressure label / 8-8

Engine number / 8-8

Specifications & Consumer information

ENGINE

DIMENSIONS

Item in. (mm)

Overall length 4100 (161.42)

Overall width 1765 (69.49)

Overall height 1600 (62.99)

Front tread

195/65R15 1553 (61.14)

205/55R16 1547 (60.91)

205/50R17 1541 (60.67)

Rear tread

195/65R15 1557 (61.30)

205/55R16 1551 (61.06)

205/50R17 1545 (60.83)

Wheelbase 2615 (102.95)

Item

Petrol 1.4 Petrol 1.6

Diesel 1.4

Displacement cu. in

(cc)

85.19

(1396)

97.09

(1591)

85.12

(1396)

Bore x Stroke in.

(mm)

3.03x2.95

(77x74.99)

3.03x3.36

(77x85.44)

2.95x3.11

(75x79)

Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2

No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line

Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type

Headlights

High 55 H7

Low 55 H7

Smart cornering lights* 55 H7

Front turn signal lights 21 P21W

Position lights 5 W5W

Side repeater lights* 5 W5W

Front fog lights* 27 H27W

Stop and tail lights 21/5 P21/5W

Tail lights 21/5 P21/5W

Rear turn signal lights 21 P21W

Back-up lights 16 W16W

Rear fog lights 21 P21W

High mounted stop light LED LED

License plate lights 5 W5W

Front map lamp 10 FEST00N

Side room lamp* 5 W5W

Centre room lamp* 8 FEST00N

Vanity mirror lamp* 5 W5W

Luggage room lamp 5 W5W

Glove box lamp 5 W5W

BULB WATTAGE

* : If equipped

Specifications & Consumer information

TYRES AND WHEELS

* Normal load : Up to 2 persons

CAUTION

When replacing tyres, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tyres of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

Item Tyre size Wheel size

Cold tyre inflation pressure psi (bar, kPa)

Wheel lug nut

torque N•m

(lb•ft, kg•m )

Normal load *

Maximum load

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tyre

195/65R15 6.0J×15

(2.2, 220)

(2.5, 250)

88~107

(65~79, 9~11 )

205/55R16 6.0J×16

205/50R17 6.5J×17

Compact spare tyre

(if equipped)

T125/80D15 4.0T×15

(4.2, 420)

WEIGHT/VOLUME

Item Petrol 1.4 Petrol 1.6 Diesel 1.4

Gross vehicle weight

lbs. (kg)

M/T 3769.9 (1710) 3769.9 (1710) 3968.3 (1800)

A/T - 3813.9 (1730) -

Luggage volume

l (cu ft)

440 (15.5) 440 (15.5) 440 (15.5)

M/T : Manual transaxle

A/T : Automatic transaxle

Specifications & Consumer information

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct

lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *

(drain and refill)

Petrol Engine

3.3 l (2.9 Imp. qts.)

For Europe

API Service SL or SM, ACEA A5 or above

Use the engine oils approved by Hyundai Motor Company.

Consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer for details.

Except Europe

API Service SM *

ILSAC GF-4 or above

Diesel Engine

5.3 l (4.66 Imp. qts.)

With DPF (Diesel Particulate filter) : ACEA C3

Without DPF (Diesel Particulate filter) : ACEA B4, API CH-4 or

above

Engine oil

consumption

Normal driving condition

MAX. 1 l /1000 miles (1500 km)

Severe driving condition

MAX. 1 l /620 miles (1000 km)

Manual

transaxle fluid

Petrol

Engine

1.4 L

1.9 l (1.67 Imp. qts.)

API GL-4 SAE 75W-85

(fill for-life)

1.6 L

1.8 l (1.58 Imp. qts.)

Diesel Engine

1.9 l (1.67 Imp. qts.)

Automatic transaxle fluid

6.8 l (5.98 Imp. qts.)

DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III

Specifications & Consumer information

: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-

omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure

in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

: If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Coolant

Petrol Engine

5.8 ~ 5.9 l

(5.10~5.19 Imp. qts.)

Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator

Diesel Engine

6.3 l (5.54 Imp. qts.)

Brake/Clutch fluid

0.7~0.8 l

(0.62~0.7 Imp. qts.)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel

48 l (10.56 Imp. gal.)

Specifications & Consumer information

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an

effect on fuel economy and cold weather

operating (engine start and engine oil

flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils

can provide better fuel economy and cold

weather performance, however, higher

viscosity engine oils are required for sat-

isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using

oils of any viscosity other than those rec-

ommended could result in engine dam-

age.

When choosing an oil, consider the

range of temperature your vehicle will be

operated in before the next oil change.

Proceed to select the recommended oil

viscosity from the chart.

CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain plug, or

dipstick before checking or drain-

ing any lubricant. This is especially

important in dusty or sandy areas

and when the vehicle is used on

unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug

and dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the engine

and other mechanisms that could

be damaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Petrol

Engine Oil *

(For Europe)

°C

(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Diesel

Engine Oil *

5W-30

15W-40

10W-30

0W-40, 5W-30, 5W-40

Petrol

Engine Oil *

(Except Europe)

20W-50

10W-30

15W-40

5W-20*

, 5W-30

: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity

grade SAE 0W-40, 5W-30, 5W-40 (API Service SL, SM / ACEA A5 or above).

: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity

grade SAE 5W-20,5W-30 (API SL, SM / ILSAC GF-3 or above). However, if the

engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the

engine oil viscosity chart.

: In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.

: If your vehicle follows 30,000 km/ 1 year interval in normal maintenance schedule,

use the engine oil of viscosity grade, SAE 5W-30 or SAE 0W-30.

5W-40

0W-30, 0W-40

Specifications & Consumer information

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

the number used in registering your car

and in all legal matters pertaining to its

ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor

under the driver seat. To check the num-

ber, remove the cover (1).

VIN label

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the

top of the dashboard. The number on the

plate can easily be seen through the

windscreen from outside.

The vehicle certification label attached

on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side

centre pillar gives the vehicle identifica-

tion number (VIN).

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION

LABEL (IF EQUIPPED)

OYN089001

■ Type A

OYN089002

■ Type B

OYN089008

The tyres supplied on your new vehicle

are chosen to provide the best perform-

ance for normal driving.

The tyre label located on the driver's side

centre pillar gives the tyre pressures rec-

ommended for your car.

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown in the drawing.

OYN089003R

TYRE SPECIFICATION AND

PRESSURE LABEL

OYN089006

Petrol engine

OYN089007

ENGINE NUMBER

Diesel engine

Specifications & Consumer information

Hyundai ix20 2016

Product's Documents

Owner's Manual

Specifications

Hyundai 2016 IX20 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor L17040C101&L17040T101 Truck Cargo Mat & Backrest Mat TPE Custom Fit for Hyundai Palisade 2020-2024

Hyundai HYSW1500E 1500W 32cm Electric Artificial Grass Sweeper and Lawn Brush

Vevor HP121 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Kia Hyundai Santa 35320-2G720 35320-2G740

Vevor HP156 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Hyundai Accent/Sonata Tucson Veloster Kia Rio

Pyle PHYELANT16 2016 Hyundai Elantra Replacement Stereo

Hyundai HY-T26 True Wireless Earphones